accent 2010my owners manual

271
8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 1/271 F1 All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time as part of our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out. This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and expla- nations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle. OWNER'S MANUAL A030A01A-AAT Operation Maintenance Specifications

Upload: fiesta1903

Post on 06-Apr-2018

217 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 1/271

F1

All information in the Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication.However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at any time as part of ourpolicy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and expla-nations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may findmaterial in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

OWNER'S MANUALA030A01A-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

Page 2: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 2/271

F2

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possiblefor an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronicsystems. For this reason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instruc-tions or consult your Hyundai dealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you chooseto install one of these devices.

!A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect theperformance, safety or durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limitedwarranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulationsestablished by the U.S. Department of Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Page 3: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 3/271

F3

!

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other personsif the warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the cautionis not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

Page 4: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 4/271

F4

A110A02A-AAT

VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is torecord, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hittinga road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. TheEDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record suchdata as:

o How various systems in your vehicle were operating;o Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes andinjuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situationoccurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data(e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as lawenforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle orthe EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.

Page 5: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 5/271

F5

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminatingpeople who drive a Hyundai. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai webuild is something of which we're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggestedthat you read it carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction youreceive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance andany other assistance that may be required.

A050A05A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai,please leave the manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants thatdo not meet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meetthe specifications listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual andwhich also appear in the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2009 Hyundai Motor America. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,stored in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permissionof Hyundai Motor America.

!

Page 6: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 6/271

F6

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the sameparts used by Hyundai Motor Companyto manufacture vehicles. They are de-signed and tested for the optimum safety,performance, and reliability to our cus-

tomers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineeredand built to meet rigid manufacturingrequirements. Using imitation, counter-feit or used salvage parts is not coveredunder the Hyundai New Vehicle Lim-ited Warranty or any other Hyundaiwarranty. In addition, any damage to or

failure of Genuine Hyundai Parts causedby the installation or failure of an imita-tion, counterfeit or used salvage part isnot covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine PartsLogo on the package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to theUnited States are packaged with labelswritten only in English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only soldthrough authorized HyundaiDealerships.

" To find the closest authorized dealercall 1-800-826-CARS "

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

Page 7: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 7/271

F7

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &

BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

Page 8: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 8/271

F8

B250A02MC-AAT

OMC010001N-2

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Page 9: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 9/271

F9

1. Hood Release Lever................................................... 1-932. Front Fog Light Switch (If Installed) ............................ 1-82

3. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch) .... 1-804. Instrument Cluster ....................................................... 1-605. Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-766. Cruise Control (If Installed) ....................................... 1-1037. Horn and Driver's Front Airbag ........................ 1-101, 1-428. Audio Remote Control Switch (If Installed) ............... 1-1029. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch .............................. 1-78

10. Hazard Warning Light Switch ..................................... 1-81

11. Digital Clock ................................................................ 1-8212. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator ..................... 1-4913. Rear Window Defroster Switch ................................... 1-8114. Audio System (If Installed) ........................................ 1-123

15. Passenger's Front Airbag ........................................... 1-4216. Glove Box .................................................................... 1-88

17. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel (If Installed) 1-10918. Multi Box ..................................................................... 1-8919. Cigarette Lighter ......................................................... 1-8220. AUX, USB and iPod ® Port ......................................... 1-10721. Power Outlet ............................................................... 1-8322. Ashtray ........................................................................ 1-8323. Shift Lever ..................................................................... 2-924. Parking Brake Lever ................................................... 1-91

25. Front Drink Holder ...................................................... 1-8426. Trunk Lid Release Lever (If Installed) ........................ 1-9727. Fuel Filler Lid Release Lever ..................................... 1-94

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument clusternor on the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas(Instrument cluster, instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas, wash them with water immediately.

!

Page 10: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 10/271

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

F10

B255A03MC-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found begining on page 1-64.

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

High Beam Indicator Light

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid LevelWarning Light

Charging System Warning Light

Door Ajar Warning Light and Chime

Trunk Lid / Tail Gate Open Warning Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Check Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light

Malfunction Indicator Light

Seat Belt Warning Light and Chime

Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light

Cruise Indicator Light (If Installed)

Cruise SET Indicator Light (If Installed)

Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)

TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)

ECO ECO Indicator (If Installed)

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If Installed)

O/D OFF Indicator

(Automatic transaxle only)

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Manual Transaxle Shift Indicator (If Installed)

Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light(If Installed)

Page 11: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 11/271

F11

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Items contained in motor vehicles oremitted from them are known to theState of California to cause cancer andbirth defects or reproductive harm.These include:

o Gasoline and its vaporso Engine exhausto Used engine oilo Interior passenger compartment

components and materialso Component parts which are subject

to heat and wearIn addition, battery posts, terminals and

related accessories contain lead, leadcompounds and other chemicals knownto the State of California to cause cancerand reproductive harm.

Page 12: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 12/271

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1

Fuel Recommendations ................................................ 1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai .................................... 1-3Keys .............................................................................. 1-3

Door Locks ................................................................... 1-4Theft-Alarm System ...................................................... 1-8Window Glass ............................................................ 1-11Seats ........................................................................... 1-13Seat Belts ................................................................... 1-22Child Restraint System............................................... 1-31Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG)System ...................................................................... 1-41

Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ..................... 1-60Warning and Indicator Lights ...................................... 1-64Trip Computer ............................................................. 1-73Multi-Function Light Switch ......................................... 1-76Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ....................... 1-78

Sunroof ....................................................................... 1-84Mirror........................................................................... 1-89Hood Release ............................................................. 1-93Cruise Control System ............................................. 1-103Heating and Cooling Control .................................... 1-108Stereo Sound System .............................................. 1-119Antenna ..................................................................... 1-122Audio System ........................................................... 1-123

1

Page 13: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 13/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

!B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai inanother country, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding reg-istration and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is avail-able.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundairecommends that you use gasolinestreated with detergent additives, whichhelp prevent deposit formation in theengine. These gasolines will help theengine run cleaner and enhance perfor-mance of the Emission Control System.

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY

B010A01MC-A

B010A02MC-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump Octane

Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number91) or higher must be used in yourHyundai.

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleadedgasoline and 10% ethanol or grain alco-hol) may be used in your Hyundai. How-ever, if your engine develops driveabilityproblems, the use of 100% unleadedgasoline is recommended. Fuels with

unspecified quantities of alcohol, oralcohols other than ethanol, should notbe used.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels contain-

ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether)over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7%weight) should not be used in yourHyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol.(Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may re-duce vehicle performance and producevapor lock or hard starting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alco-hol) should not be used in your Hyundai.This type of fuel can reduce vehicle per-formance and damage components of

the fuel system.

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problemsthat are caused by the use of fuels con-taining methanol or fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.)

!

WARNING:o Do not "top off" after the nozzle au-

tomatically shuts off when refueling.o Tighten the cap until it clicks, other-

wise the " " light will illuminate.o Always check that the fuel cap is

installed securely to prevent fuelspillage in the event of an accident.

Page 14: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 14/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

3

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

3BREAKING IN YOUR NEWHYUNDAI

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1200 Miles (2000Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is requiredwith your new Hyundai. However, youcan contribute to the economical opera-tion and durability of your Hyundai byobserving the following recommenda-tions during the first 1200 miles (2000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/ h).

o While driving, keep your engine speed(rpm, or revolutions per minute) be-tween 2,000 rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the acceleratorpedal fully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try toavoid hard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words,don't drive so slowly in too high a gearthat the engine "bucks"-shift to a lowergear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary yourspeed from time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3minutes at one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200miles (2,000 km) of operation.

KEYS

B030A01A-AAT

For greater convenience, the same keyoperates all the locks in your Hyundai.However, because the doors can belocked without a key, carrying a spare keyis recommended in case you accidentallylock one key inside the car.

OMC025001

Page 15: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 15/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

4

B040B02A-AAT

Locking and Unlocking Front Doorswith a Key

o The door can be locked or unlockedwith a key.o Lock the door by turning the key to-

ward the front of the vehicle and un-lock it by turning the key toward therear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked byturning the key once toward the rear. Ifyou wish to unlock all doors, turn the keyagain toward the rear within 4 seconds(With the central door locking system).

OMC025005

UNLOCK

LOCK

DOOR LOCKS

!

B030B01NF-GAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is recorded on the num-

ber tag that came with the keys to yourHyundai. This key number tag should notbe left with the keys but kept in a safeplace, not in the vehicle. The key numbershould also be recorded in a place whereit can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if youshould lose your keys, your authorized

Hyundai dealer can make new keys if youcan supply the key number.

B030B01MC

B040A01A-AAT

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous.

Before you drive away (especially ifthere are children in the car), be surethat all the doors are securely closedand locked so that the doors cannotbe opened from the inside. This helpsensure that the doors will not beopened accidentally. Also, when com-bined with the proper use of seatbelts, locking the doors helps keepoccupants from being ejected fromthe car in case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.

Page 16: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 16/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

5

The doors can be locked without a key.

To lock the doors, first push the insidelock switch to the "LOCK" position so thatthe red mark on the switch is not visible,then close the door.

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the

passenger's door to the "LOCK" po-

sition, all doors can be locked.o If your vehicle is equipped with thecentral door locking system, the doorwill not lock if the key is left in theignition switch when the front doorsare closed.

B040C01MC-AAT

Locking from Outside

B040C04MC

o When locking the door from outside,be careful not to lock the door withthe ignition key left in the vehicle.

o To protect against theft, always re-move the ignition key, close all win-dows, and lock all doors and thetrunk lid (4 Door) / tail gate (3 Door)when leaving your vehicle unat-tended.

B040D01MC-AAT

Locking from the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simply

close the door and push the lock switchto the "LOCK" position.

NOTE:o When pushing the lock switch of the

passenger's door to the "LOCK" po-sition, all doors can be locked.

o When the door is locked, the red

mark on the switch is not visible.o The driver's door can be opened bypulling the inside door handle even ifthe inside lock switch is pushed tothe "LOCK" position.

OMC025006

UNLOCK

LOCK

Page 17: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 17/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

6

!

B040E04A-AAT

CHILD-PROTECTOR REAR DOORLOCK (4 Door)

Your Hyundai is equipped with left andright side "child-protector" rear door locks.

B040G01MC-AAT

Central Door Locks (If Installed)

The central door locking switch is lo-

cated on the driver's armrest. It is oper-ated by depressing the door lock switch.If any door is open when the switch isdepressed to the "LOCK" position, thedoor will remain locked when closed.

NOTE:o When depressing the front portion

of the door lock switch, all vehicledoors will lock.o When depressing the rear portion of

the switch, all vehicle doors will un-lock.

B040E01MC

WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the insidedoor handle, the door can be opened andyou may be ejected from the vehicle andcan be injured or killed.

When the lock mechanism is engaged,the rear door cannot be opened from theinside. Its use is recommended when-ever there are small children in the rearseat.

To engage the child-protector feature sothat the door cannot be opened from theinside, move the child-protector lever tothe " " position and close the door. Movethe lever to the " " position when nor-mal door operation is desired.

To open the door from the outside, pullthe outside door handle.

OMC029047

UNLOCK LOCK

Page 18: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 18/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

7

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

7

o The driver's door can be opened bypulling the inside door handle even ifthe front portion of the central doorlocking switch has been depressedto lock the doors.

o If the door is locked/unlocked mul-tiple times in rapid succession witheither the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop operat-ing temporarily in order to protectthe circuit and prevent damage tosystem components.

o The central door locking is operatedby turning the key in the driver'sdoor lock toward the front or rear ofthe vehicle.

B070F03O-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM(If Installed)

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK" button on thetransmitter.

2. Two turn unlock modeAt the same time the driver's door un-locks, the turn signal light will blink twiceto indicate that the system is unlocked.If you wish to unlock all doors, press the"UNLOCK" button on the transmitteragain within 4 seconds.

Central door unlock mode (If Installed)At the same time all doors unlock, theturn signal light will blink twice to indi-cate that the system is unlocked.

This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.

! WARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside doorhandle while driving. If you pull the in-side door handle, the door can be openedand you may be ejected from the ve-

hicle and can be injured or killed.

! WARNING:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s au-thority to operate the equipment. If thekeyless entry system is inoperativedue to changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance, it will not be

covered by your manufacturer’s ve-hicle warranty.

NOTE:Unlock mode conversion (two turn un-lock mode ↔↔↔↔↔ central door unlock mode)(If Installed)

The unlock mode is changed alternatelyby pressing the lock button and unlock button at the same time for 4 seconds ormore. The turn signal light will blink four

times to indicate that the mode conver-sion is completed.

3. At the same time all doors lock, theturn signal light will blink once to indi-cate that the system is locked.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK" button on the trans-

mitter.

Page 19: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 19/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

8 THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

(If Installed)This system is designed to provide pro-tection from unauthorized entry into thecar. This system is operated in threestages: the first is the "Armed" stage, thesecond is the "Alarm" stage, and the thirdis the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the

system provides an audible alarm withblinking of the turn signal lights.

!B070B02MC-A

B070B02MC-AAT

Armed Stage

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described in the following para-graph.

1) Remove the ignition key from the igni-tion switch.

2) Make sure that all doors, tail gate (3Door) and engine hood are closedand latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter ofthe keyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, theturn signal lights will blink once to indi-cate that the system is armed.

The system can be armed by locking thedoors with the key from the front doors ortail gate (3 Door). However, the hazardwarning lights are not operated.

NOTE:If any door, tail gate (3 Door) or enginehood remains open, the system will notbe armed. If this happens, rearm thesystem as described above.

CAUTION:o Do not arm the system until all pas-

sengers have left the car. If the sys-tem is armed while a passenger(s)remains in the car, the alarm may beactivated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

LOCK

NOTE:The transmitter will not work if any offollowing occur:- The ignition key is in ignition switch.- You exceed the operating distance

limit (10 m).- The battery in the transmitter is weak.- Other vehicles or objects may be

blocking the signal.- The weather is extremely cold.- The transmitter is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio stationor an airport which can interfere withnormal operation of the transmitter.

When the transmitter does not work correctly, open and close the door withthe ignition key. If you have a problemwith the transmitter, contact an autho-rized Hyundai Dealer.

NOTE:Keep the transmitter away from water orany liquid. If the keyless entry system isinoperative due to exposure to water orliquids, it will not be covered by yourmanufacturer vehicle warranty.

Page 20: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 20/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

9

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

9

B070C02MC-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of thefollowing occurs while the car is parkedand the system is armed.

1) Any door, tail gate (3 Door) included,is opened without using the transmitteror the ignition key.

2) The engine hood is opened.

The alarming horn will sound and the turnsignal lights will blink continuously for 27seconds (This happens 3 times). To turn

off the system, unlock the door with thetransmitter or the ignition key.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!

B070D02MC-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed when the

following step is taken:The doors are unlocked by depressingthe "UNLOCK" button on the transmitteror unlocked with the ignition key.

After depressing unlock button, the haz-ard warning lights will blink twice to indi-

cate that the system is disarmed.If any door, tail gate (3 Door) included, isnot opened within 30 seconds, the sys-tem will be rearmed.

B070D02MC-A

UNLOCK

o If the "LOCK" button is pressed oncemore within 4 seconds after pushingthe "LOCK" button on the transmit-ter, the alarming horn will sound onceto indicate that the system is armed.

B070E01MC-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the trans-mitter.

2. At the same time, the alarming hornwill sound and the turn signal lightswill blink continuously for 30 seconds.

3. To turn off the system, push any buttonon the transmitter or lock/unlock thedoors by turning the key.

B070E02MC-A

NOTE:When the system is disarmed with theinterior light switched to "DOOR", theinterior light will illuminate for 30 sec-onds.

Page 21: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 21/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

10

Battery

1KMA2003

B070E02MC-AAT

Replacing the batteryWhen the transmitter's battery begins toget weak, it may take several pushes onthe button to lock or unlock the doors, andthe LED will not light. Replace the batteryas soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with ablade screwdriver.

2. Remove the old battery from the caseand note the polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame(+side facing up), then insert it inthe transmitter.

CAUTION:An inappropriately disposed battery canbe harmful to the environment and hu-man health. Dispose the battery accord-ing to your local law(s) or regulation.

!CAUTION:Do not change, alter or adjust the theft-alarm system because it could causethe theft-alarm system to malfunctionand should only be serviced by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.Malfunctions caused by improper alter-ations, adjustments or modifications tothe theft-alarm system are not coveredby your vehicle manufacturer warranty.

!

Page 22: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 22/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

11

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

11WINDOW GLASS

!

3FDA2015

B050A01MC-AAT

To lower or raise the window, turn thewindow regulator handle clockwise orcounterclockwise.

WARNING:When opening or closing the windows,make sure your passenger's arms,hands and body are safely out of the way.

B060A03MC-AAT

POWER WINDOWS (If Installed)

The power windows operate when theignition key is in the "ON" position. Themain switches are located on the driver'sarmrest and control the front (4/3 Door)and rear windows (4 Door) on both sidesof the vehicle. The windows may beopened by depressing the appropriatewindow switch and closed by pulling upthe switch. To open the window on thedriver's side, press the switch (1) halfwaydown. The window moves as long as theswitch is operated. To fully open thedriver's window automatically, press theswitch fully down.In automatic operation, the window willfully open even if you let go of the switch.To stop at the desired opening, pull upand release the switch.

4 Door

3 Door

OMC029048

NOTE:While driving with the rear windows downor with the sunroof (if installed) in an open(or partially open) position, your vehiclemay demonstrate a wind buffetingor pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-mal occurrence and can be reduced oreliminated by taking the following ac-tions. If the noise occurs with one orboth of the rear windows down,partially lower both front windows ap-proximately one inch. If you experiencethe noise with the sunroof open, slightlyreduce the size of the sunroof opening.

Page 23: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 23/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

12

! WARNING:o Passengers can be injured if their

head, hands or other body parts aretrapped by a closing window. Al-ways check for obstructions beforeraising any window.

o NEVER leave the ignition key in thevehicle.

o NEVER leave any child unattendedin the vehicle. Even very youngchildren may inadvertently cause thevehicle to move, entangle them-selves in the windows, or otherwiseinjure themselves or others.

OMC025015

CLOSE

OPEN

! WARNING:o Do not attempt to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and aswitch on another door in opposingdirections at the same time. If this isdone, the window will stop and can-not be opened or closed.

OMC029049

In order to prevent operation of the pas-senger front (4/3 Door) and rear windows(4 Door), a window lock switch (2) is

provided on the armrest of the driver'sdoor. To disable the power windows,press the window lock switch. To revert tonormal operation, press the window lockswitch a second time.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for

30 seconds after the ignition key isturned to the "ACC" or "LOCK" posi-tions, or removed from the ignitionswitch. If the front doors are openedduring this 30 second period, the powerwindows can no longer be operated with-out the ignition key turned to the "ON"position.

Page 24: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 24/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

13

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

13SEATS

Driver’s seat

1. Seat forward/rearward lock releaselever

2. Seatback recliner control lever3. Seat cushion height control lever

Front passenger’s seat

4. Seat forward/rearward lock releaselever

5. Seatback recliner control lever

Rear seats

6. Seatback folding lever (If Installed)7. Armrest (If Installed)

B080A01MC-AAT

OMC029025B

4 Door

3 Door

Page 25: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 25/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

14

To move the seat toward the front or rear,pull the lock release lever upward. Thiswill release the seat on its track so youcan move it forward or rearward to thedesired position.When you find the position you want,release the lever and slide the seat for-

ward or rearward on its track until it locksinto the desired position and cannot bemoved further.

! WARNING:After adjusting the seat, always check that it is securely locked into place byattempting to move the seat forward orrearward without using the lock releaselever. Sudden or unexpected move-ment of the driver's seat could causeyou to lose control of the vehicle result-ing in an accident.

B080B03A-AAT

FRONT SEATSAdjusting Seat Forward and Rear-ward! WARNING:

o Never adjust the driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. Any suddenor unexpected movement of the seat

could cause you to lose control ofthe vehicle resulting in an accident.Only adjust the driver’s seat whenthe vehicle is stationary.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbag. Position the seat sothat you can sit as far back as pos-sible from the airbag and still com-

fortably reach all controls.

B080A01FC-AAT

ADJUSTABLE SEATS

OMC029026

Page 26: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 26/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

15

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

15

B080C02A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to

take your weight off it, then pull up on therecliner control lever at the outside edgeof the seat. Now lean back until the de-sired seatback angle is achieved. To lockthe seatback into position, release therecliner control lever.

! WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatback in-creases your chance of serious or fatalinjuries in the event of a collision orsudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts and airbags)is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snug against yourhips and chest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hips willslide under the lap belt or the occupant'sneck will strike the shoulder belt. Driv-ers and passengers should always sitwell back in their seats, properly belted,and with the seatbacks upright.

OMC029027

C010104AMC

Headrest

The driver's and front passenger's seatsare equipped with a headrest for theoccupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides comfortfor the driver and front passenger, butalso helps to protect the head and neckin the event of a collision.

OBH038075L

Page 27: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 27/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

16

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-

rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

Removal

To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)

while pulling upward (2).To reinstall the headrest, put the headrestpoles (3) into the holes while pressing therelease button (1). Then adjust it to theappropriate height.

OMC029029 OMC029030

! WARNING:Make sure the headrest locks in positionafter adjusting it to properly protects theoccupants.

! WARNING:o For maximum effectiveness in case

of an accident, the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height of thecenter of gravity of an occupant'shead. Generally, the center of grav-ity of most people's head is similarwith the height of the top of theireyes. Also, adjust the headrest asclose to your head as possible. Forthis reason, the use of a cushion thatholds the body away from theseatback is not recommended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with theheadrests removed as severe injuryto the occupants may occur in theevent of an accident. Headrests mayprovide protection against neck inju-ries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest positionof the driver's seat while the vehicleis in motion.

Page 28: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 28/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

17

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

17

B080G01A-GAT

Adjusting Armrest Angle(Driver's side only)

The armrest will be raised or loweredmanually.To raise the armrest, pull it up.To lower it, press the armrest down.

OMC025031

B080F01MC-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat only)

To raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion, turn the knob forward or rear-ward.

OMC029028

B130A01A-AAT

REAR SEAT ENTRY (3 Door)

The front passenger's seatback should

be tilted to enter the rear seat.By pulling up on the recliner control lever(1) at the outside of the front passenger'sseat, the seatback will tilt forward and theseat will automatically slide forward.Rear seat occupants can tilt the frontpassenger's seatback by depressing thefoot lever (2) as shown in the illustration.

HTB258

(1)

(2)

! WARNING:Passengers sitting in the rear seat shouldbe careful not to accidentally press thefoot lever (2) while the vehicle is moving,as this may cause the seatback to move

forward and injure a front seat occupant.

Page 29: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 29/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

18

B085A01MC-GAT

REAR SEATAdjusting seatback angle (3 Door)

To recline the seatback, pull up theseatback folding lever (1) and push theseatback rearward.To return the seatback to an upright po-sition, pull up the seatback folding lever(1) and pull the seatback forward until theseatback locks into upright position.After adjusting the seatback angle, al-

ways check that it is securely locked intoplace.

B085A01MC

(1)

! WARNING:Do not adjust the seatback angle whilethe vehicle is in motion.

C010303BUN

Headrest

OBH038076L

The rear seat(s) is equipped with head-rests in all the seating positions for theoccupant's safety and comfort.The headrest not only provides comfortfor passengers, but also helps to protectthe head and neck in the event of acollision.

! WARNING:o For maximum effectiveness in case

of an accident, the headrest shouldbe adjusted so the middle of theheadrest is at the same height of thecenter of gravity of an occupant'shead. Generally, the center of grav-ity of most people's head is similarwith the height of the top of theireyes. Also, adjust the headrest asclose to your head as possible. Theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not rec-ommended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with theheadrests removed as severe injuryto an occupant may occur in theevent of an accident. Headrests mayprovide protection against severeneck injuries when properly adjusted.

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

Page 30: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 30/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

19

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

19

Adjusting the height up and down(If Installed)

To raise the headrest, pull it up to thedesired position (1). To lower the head-rest, push and hold the release button (2)on the headrest support and lower theheadrest to the desired position (3).

Removal (If Installed)

To remove the headrest, raise it as far asit can go then press the release button (1)

while pulling upward (2).To reinstall the headrest, put the headrestpoles (3) into the holes while pressing therelease button (1). Then adjust it to theappropriate height.

OMC029045

OMC029046

! WARNING:Make sure the headrest locks in positionafter adjusting it to properly protect theoccupants.

!

B110A02MC-AAT

Folding Rear SeatbacksThe rear seatbacks may be folded tofacilitate carrying long items or to increasethe luggage capacity of the vehicle.

WARNING:The purpose of the fold-down rearseatbacks is to allow you to carry longerobjects than could otherwise be accom-modated.Never allow passengers to sit on top ofthe folded down seatback or cargo areawhile the car is moving as this is not aproper seating position and no seat beltsare available for use. This could result inserious injury or death in case of anaccident or sudden stop. Objects car-ried on the folded down seatback shouldnot extend higher than the top of the frontseats. This could allow cargo to slideforward and cause injury or damageduring sudden stops.

1 FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

Page 31: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 31/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

20

3. Pull up the seatback folding lever torelease the seatback.

o Before folding the seatback, insertthe buckle in the pocket. This canprevent the buckle from being dam-aged by the seatback.

B110A01MC

To fold down the seatback :

1. Slide the front seats forward and ad- just the front seatbacks to be uprightbefore folding the rear seatbacks down.

2. Lower the rear seat headrests to thelowest position.

B220D05MC

o In order to prevent the center shoul-der belt from being damaged whilefolding the rear seat, disconnect themetal tab (A) from the buckle (B). Todisconnect the metal tab (A) fromthe buckle (B) , insert a narrow-endedtool into the groove located on thebuckle (B).

! CAUTION:

B090A02MC

OMC029041

4 Door

3 Door

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

1FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

Page 32: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 32/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

21

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

21

! CAUTION:

o Move the rear lap/shoulder belt tothe outside so that they don't inter-fere with the seatback when folding.

o Move the rear lap/shoulder belt tothe side so that it is clear of theseatback when returning to its up-right position.

o Place the rear seat belt to the properposition.

OMC025040

OMC025039

OMC029039

4 Door

3 Door

OMC029040

4 Door

3 Door 4. Fold down the seatback forward.

When you return the seatback to its up-

right position, always be sure it has lockedinto position by pushing on the top of theseatback.

OMC039100

1 FEATURESOFYOURHYUNDAI

Page 33: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 33/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

22 SEAT BELTS

B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggageor other cargo should not be piled higherthan the top of the seatback. In addition,do not place objects on the rear shelf asthey may move forward during braking orin an accident and strike vehicle passen-

gers.

B140A01MC

!!

B150A02S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must weartheir seat belts at all times. Seat beltsand child restraints reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries for all occupantsin the event of a collision or sudden stop.Without a seat belt, occupants could beshifted too close to a deploying airbag,strike the interior structure or be thrownfrom the vehicle. Properly worn seatbelts greatly reduce these hazards. Evenwith advanced airbags, unbelted occu-pants can be severely injured by a de-ploying airbag. Always follow the pre-cautions about seat belts, airbags andoccupant safety contained in thismanual.

! WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after being folded down:Be careful not to damage the seat beltwebbing or buckle. Do not allow the seatbelt webbing or buckle to get caught orpinched in the rear seat. Ensure that theseatback is completely locked into itsupright position by pushing on the top ofthe seatback. Otherwise, in an accidentor sudden stop, the seat could fold downand allow cargo to enter the passengercompartment, which could result in se-rious injury or death.

Page 34: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 34/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 35: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 35/271

124

!B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per BeltTwo people (including children) shouldnever attempt to use a single seat belt.This could increase the severity of inju-ries in case of an accident.

B150G02A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in theevent of an accident and to achieve maxi-mum effectiveness of the restraint sys-tem, all passengers should be sitting upand the front seats should be in an up-right position when the car is moving. Aseat belt cannot provide proper protec-tion if the person is lying down in the rearseat or if the front seat is in a reclinedposition.

WARNING:Riding with a reclined seatback in-creases your chance of serious or fatalinjuries in the event of a collision orsudden stop. The protection of yourrestraint system (seat belts and airbags)is greatly reduced by reclining your seat.Seat belts must be snug against yourhips and chest to work properly. Themore the seatback is reclined, the greaterthe chance that an occupant's hips willslide under the lap belt causing seriousinternal injuries or the occupant's neck could strike the shoulder belt. Driversand passengers should always sit wellback in their seats, properly belted (seepage 1-26), and with the seatbacks up-right.

C020302AKM

Restraint of pregnant womenPregnant women should wear lap/shoul-der belt assemblies whenever possibleaccording to specific recommendationsby their doctors. The lap portion of the beltshould be worn AS SNUGLY AND LOWAS POSSIBLE.

B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when aninjured person is being transported. Whenthis is necessary, you should consult aphysician for recommendations.

! WARNING - Pregnant womenPregnant women must never place thelap portion of the safety belt over thearea of the abdomen where the fetus islocated or above the abdomen where thebelt could crush the fetus during an im-pact.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 36: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 36/271

125

125

!

B160A02A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTSSeat belt systems should never be disas-sembled or modified. In addition, careshould be taken to assure that seat beltsand belt hardware are not damaged byseat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback was folded down, be careful not to dam-age the seat belt webbing or buckle. Besure that the webbing or buckle does notget caught or pinched in the rear seat. Aseat belt with damaged webbing or bucklewill not be as strong and could possiblyfail during a collision or sudden stop,resulting in serious injury.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assemblies shouldbe replaced if the vehicle has been in-volved in an accident. This should bedone even if no damage is visible. Addi-tional questions concerning seat beltoperation should be directed to yourHyundai Dealer.

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry.If belts become dirty, they can be cleanedby using a mild soap solution and warmwater. Bleach, dye, strong detergents orabrasives should not be used becausethey may damage and weaken the fabric.

B170A02MC-AAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

B170A01MC

You can adjust the height of the shoulderbelt anchor to one of the 4 positions formaximum comfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt istoo near your neck, you will not be gettingthe most effective protection. The shoul-der portion should be adjusted so that itlies across your chest and midway overyour shoulder nearest the door and notyour neck. To adjust the height of the seatbelt anchor, lower or raise the heightadjuster into an appropriate position. Toraise the height adjuster, pull it up.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic InspectionIt is recommended that all seat belts beinspected periodically for wear or dam-age of any kind. Parts of the system thatare damaged should be replaced as soonas possible.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 37: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 37/271

126

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of theretractor and insert the metal tab into thebuckle. There will be an audible "click"when the tab locks into the buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to theproper length only after the lap belt isadjusted manually so that it fits snugly

around your hips. If you lean forward in aslow, easy motion, the belt will extendand let you move around. If there is asudden stop or impact, however, the beltwill lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.

B180A01MC-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point Systemwith Emergency Locking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

B180A01NF

! WARNING:o Verify the shoulder belt anchor is

locked into position at the appropri-ate height. Never position the shoul-der belt across your neck or face.Improperly positioned seat belts cancause serious injuries in an acci-dent.

o Failure to replace seat belts after anaccident could leave you with dam-aged seat belts that will not provideprotection in the event of anothercollision leading to personal injury ordeath. Replace your seat belts afterbeing in an accident as soon as pos-sible.

To lower it, push it down while pressingthe height adjuster button. Release thebutton to lock the anchor into position. Trysliding the height adjuster to make surethat it has locked into the position.

OMC025042-1

! CAUTION:o Adjust the shoulder belt height whenyou sit well back in the seat.

o When adjusting the shoulder beltheight, grip the height adjuster but-ton securely and slide the heightadjuster up or down.

o If the shoulder belt anchor is notmoved, grasp the shoulder part ofthe belt and pull forward to the full.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 38: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 38/271

2727

NOTE:If the seat belt is not fastened when theignition key is turned from the "OFF"position to the "ON" position, the seatbelt warning will activate to remind thedriver to fasten the seat belt as follows.

The driver's seat belt warning light andchime will activate to the following tablewhen the ignition switch is in "ON" posi-tion.

B265E01MC-AAT

Seat Belt Warning Lightand Chime

Conditions Warning Pattern

Seat Belt Vehicle Speed Light-Blink Chime-Sound

Unbuckled

Buckled

Buckled →→→→→ Unbuckled

Unbuckled

Above 6mph(10 km/h)

↓Below 3mph

(5 km/h)

6 seconds

6 seconds

6 seconds *1)↓

Stop *2)

6 seconds None

B190A03A-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger andRear Seat 3-Point System with Com-bination Locking Retractor :To Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts areinstalled in the rear seat outboard andcenter positions to help accommodatethe installation of child restraint systems.Hyundai strongly recommends that chil-dren always be seated in the rear seat .NEVER place any infant restraint systemin the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the fea-tures of both an emergency locking re-tractor seat belt and an automatic lockingretractor seat belt. To fasten your seatbelt, pull it out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab into the buckle. There willbe an audible "click" when the tab locksinto the buckle. When not securing a childrestraint, the seat belt operates in thesame way as the driver's seat belt (Emer-gency Locking Retractor Type). It auto-matically adjusts to the proper length onlyafter the lap belt portion of the seat belt isadjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips.

*1) Warning pattern repeats 11 times withan interval of 24 seconds. If the driver'sseat belt is buckled, the light will stopwithin 6 seconds and chime will stopimmediately.

*2) The light will stop within 6 secondsand chime will stop immediately.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 39: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 39/271

28

! WARNING:

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion aslow as possible and snugly across yourhips, not on your waist. If the lap belt islocated too high on your waist, it mayincrease the chance of injury in the eventof a collision. Both arms should not beunder or over the belt. Rather, one shouldbe over and the other under, as shown inthe illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

B200A01NF

o Children age 12 and younger mustalways be properly restrained in therear seat. Never allow children toride in the front passenger seat. If achild over 13 must be seated in thefront seat, he/she must be properlybelted and the seat should be movedas far back as possible.

o Never wear the shoulder belt underyour arm or behind your back. Animproperly positioned shoulder beltcan cause serious injuries in a crash.The shoulder belt should be posi-tioned midway over your shoulderacross your collarbone.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. Ina collision, it could even cut into you.Be sure the belt webbing is straightand not twisted.

o Be careful not to damage the beltwebbing or hardware. If the belt web-bing or hardware is damaged, re-place it.

When the seat belt is fully extended from

the retractor to allow the installation of achild restraint system, the seat belt opera-tion changes to allow the belt to retract,but not to extend (Automatic LockingRetractor Type). See page 1-38.

NOTE:Although the combination retractor pro-

vides the same level of protection forseated passengers in either emergencyor automatic locking modes, it is recom-mended that seated passengers use theemergency locking feature for improvedconvenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode, al-low the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.

! WARNING:

o For maximum restraint system pro-tection, seat belts must always beused whenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright posi-tion.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 40: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 40/271

2929

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

The seat belt is released by pressing therelease button in the locking buckle. Whenit is released, the belt should automati-cally draw back into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt tobe sure it is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01NF

B220D02MC-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center 3-Point System With Emergency Lock-ing Retractor

1. Before fastening the rear seat centerbelt, confirm the metal tab (A) andbuckle (B) are latched together.

B220D01MC

2. After confirming that (A) and (B) arelatched, pull the seat belt out of theretractor and insert the metal tab (C)into the buckle (D).

B220D02MC

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 41: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 41/271

30

! WARNING:o Never let anyone ride in the rear

center seat without fastening allmetal tabs and buckles as describedin this section. This seat belt isdesigned to function as a typical 3-point restraint (lap/shoulder belt).

Using only the shoulder portion orlap portion of the belt can result inserious or fatal injuries in the eventof a collision or sudden stop.

o Never unlock the metal tab (A) andthe buckle (B) with the following ex-ceptions.(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks

down.(2) If transporting an object on the

rear seat may cause damage tothe rear seat center belt.

B220D04MC

There will be an audible "click" when thetab locks in the buckle. The seat beltautomatically adjusts to the proper lengthonly after the lap belt is adjusted manu-ally so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion,the belt will extend and let you movearound. If there is a sudden stop or im-pact, the belt will lock into position. It willalso lock if you try to lean forward tooquickly.

NOTE:Confirm the metal tab and the bucklemarked "CENTER" are latched together.

B220D03MC

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 42: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 42/271

3131

!

B220D05MC

To disconnect the metal tab (A) from thebuckle (B), insert a narrow-ended toolinto the groove located on the buckle (B).

WARNING:Always lock metal tab (A) into buckle (B)immediately after returning the rearseatbacks to an upright position. Thisportion of the rear center seat belt shouldonly be unbuckled when the rear

seatback is folded down.

!

B220C02A-GAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt,

press the button in the locking buckle.

WARNING:When fastening the outboard seat beltsor the center seat belt, make sure theyare inserted into the correct buckles toobtain maximum protection from the seatbelt system and assure proper opera-tion.

B210A01NF

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A05A-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in therear seat and must always be properlyrestrained to minimize the risk of injury inan accident, sudden stop or suddenmaneuver. According to accident statis-tics provided by the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly re-strained in the rear seats than in the frontseat. Larger children not in a child re-straint should use one of the seat beltsprovided.All 50 states have child restraint laws.You should be aware of the specific re-quirements in your state. Child and/orinfant safety seats must be properly placedand installed in the rear seat . You mustuse a commercially available child re-straint system that meets the requirementsof the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dards (FMVSS).Child restraint systems are designed tobe secured in vehicle seats by lap beltsor the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulderbelt, or by a LATCH system (If Installed).Children could be injured or killed in acrash if their restraints are not properlysecured.

Page 43: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 43/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 44: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 44/271

3333

! WARNING:o Never allow a child to stand-up or

kneel on the seat or floorboard of amoving vehicle. During a collision orsudden stop, the child can be vio-lently thrown against the vehicle'sinterior, resulting in serious injury.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over aseatback, it may not provide ad-equate security in an accident.

o Seat belts can become very hot, es-pecially when the car is parked indirect sunlight. Always check seatbelt buckles before fastening themover a child.

o Always store or secure a child seat,even when it is not in use. During acollision or sudden stop, the childseat could be thrown inside the ve-hicle.

B230B01E-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System withthe "Tether Anchorage" System

For small children and babies, the use ofa child seat or infant seat is required. Thischild seat or infant seat should be ofappropriate size for the child and shouldbe installed in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in thevehicle's rear seat since this can make animportant contribution to safety. Your ve-hicle is provided with three child restrainthook holders for installing the child seator infant seat.

B230C02MC-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat withthe "Tether Anchorage" System(4 Door)

Three child restraint hook holders arelocated on the rear seat package tray.

To install the child restraint seat

B230C01MC

1. Open the tether anchor cover on therear seat package tray.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 45: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 45/271

34

B230E02MC-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat withthe "Tether Anchorage" System(3 Door)

Three child restraint hook holders arelocated on the rear floor panel.

To install the child restraint seat

! WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.

o Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-chorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.

1. Open the tether anchor cover on therear floor panel.

B230E01MC

2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook (2) to thechild restraint hook holder (1) andtighten to secure the seat.

B230C02MC

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 46: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 46/271

3535

B230C02MC

2. Route the child restraint seat strapover the seatback.For vehicles with adjustable headrests,route the tether strap under the head-rest and between the headrest posts,otherwise route the tether strap overthe top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook (2) to thechild restraint hook holder (1) throughthe hole on the covering shelf andtighten to secure the seat.

! WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.

o Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-chorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.

B230D08E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seatwith the "Child Seat Lower Anchor"system

Some child seat manufacturers makesafety seats that are labeled as LATCH orLATCH-compatible child seats. LATCHstands for "Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children". These seats include tworigid or webbing mounted attachmentsthat connect to two LATCH anchors at

specific seating positions in your vehicle.This type of child seat eliminates theneed to use seat belts to attach the childseat in the rear seats.LATCH anchors have been provided inyour vehicle. The LATCH anchors arelocated in the left and right outboard rearseating positions.

B230D01MC

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

Page 47: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 47/271

36

Child restraint symbols are located on theleft and right rear seatbacks to indicatethe position of the lower anchors for childrestraints.

OMC029201N

Lower Anchor

Lower AnchorPosition Indicator!

o When using the vehicle’s “LATCH”system to install a child restraintsystem in the rear seat, all unusedvehicle rear seat belt metal latchplates or tabs must be latched se-curely in their seat belt buckles and

the seat belt webbing must be re-tracted behind the child restraint toprevent the child from reaching andtaking hold of unretracted seat belts.Unlatched metal latch plates or tabsmay allow the child to reach theunretracted seat belts which mayresult in strangulation and a serious

injury or death to the child in the childrestraint.

WARNING:

WARNING:o A child can be seriously injured or

killed in a collision if the child re-straint is not properly anchored.Always follow the child seatmanufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.

o Never install a child restraint usingthe LATCH lower anchors at the cen-ter position of the rear seat. In acrash, the LATCH lower anchors may

break if a car seat is improperlyplaced in the center position result-ing in serious or fatal injuries. Onlyplace a LATCH or LATCH-compat-ible child seat in the left or right out-board rear seating positions (asshown) to the appropriate LATCHanchors provided.

o Never mount more than one childrestraint to a single tether or to asingle lower anchorage point. Theincreased load caused by multipleseats may cause the tethers or an-chorage points to break, causingserious injury or death.

!

Their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion. There is no LATCH anchor providedfor the center rear seating position.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

37

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

37

Page 48: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 48/271

3737

Follow the child seat manufacturer's in-structions to properly install child restraintseats with LATCH or LATCH-compatibleattachments.

Once you have installed the LATCH childrestraint seat, assure that the seat is prop-erly attached to the LATCH and tetheranchors. Also, test the safety seat beforeyou place the child in it. Tilt the seat fromside to side. Also try to tug the seat for-ward. Check to see if the anchors hold theseat in place.

!

B230F01A-AAT

Child Restraint System Installationon Rear Seat Center Position

Use the center seat belt for the rear seatto secure the child restraint system asillustrated. After installation of the childrestraint system, rock the child seat backand forth, and side to side to ensure thatit is properly secured by the seat belt. Ifthe child seat moves, readjust the lengthof the seat belt. Then, if equipped, insertthe child restraint tether strap hook intothe child restraint hook holder and tightento secure the seat. Always refer to thechild restraint system manufacturer's rec-ommendation before installing the childrestraint system in your vehicle.

B230F02MC

B230D03MC

! CAUTION:Do not allow the rear seat belt webbing toget scratched or pinched by the childseat latch and LATCH anchor during theinstallation.

WARNING:A child can be seriously injured or killedin a collision if the child restraint is notproperly anchored to the car and thechild is not properly restrained in thechild restraint. Always follow the child

seat manufacturer’s instructions for in-stallation and use.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

38

Page 49: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 49/271

38

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Auto-

matic Locking mode, the child re-straint can move when your vehicleturns or stops suddenly. A child canbe seriously injured or killed if thechild restraint is not properly an-

chored to the car, including settingthe retractor to the Automatic Lock-ing mode.

o Do not install any child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger seat.Should an accident occur and causethe passenger side airbag to deploy,it could severely injure or kill an

infant or child seated in an infant orchild seat. Therefore, only use a childrestraint system in the rear seat ofyour vehicle.

o Before installing a Child RestraintSystem to vehicles fitted with CurtainAirbags, always refer to safety no-tices for Curtain Airbag systems inthis manual. Whenever installing childrestraints, use only approved devicesand refer to the "Child Restraint Sys-tem" section to ensure correct instal-lation and that occupant protection ismaximized.

If the retractor is in the automatic locking

mode, the belt will be locked. After instal-lation of the child restraint system, try tomove it in all directions to be sure thechild restraint system is securely installed.If you need to tighten the belt, pull morewebbing toward the retractor. When youunbuckle the seat belt and allow it toretract, the retractor will automatically

revert back to its normal seated passen-ger emergency locking usage condition.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint

system, read the instructions sup-plied by the child restraint systemmanufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate asdescribed, have the system checkedimmediately by your authorizedHyundai dealer.

To install a child restraint system in theoutboard rear seats, extend the shoulder/ lap belt entirely from its retractor until a"click" is felt. This will engage the seat beltretractor automatic locking feature, whichallows the seat belt to retract but notextend. Install the child restraint system,buckle the seat belt and allow the seatbelt to take up any slack. Make sure thatthe lap portion of the belt is tight aroundthe child restraint system and the shoul-der portion of the belt is positioned so thatit cannot interfere with the child's head orneck. Also, double check to be sure thatthe retractor has engaged the automaticlocking feature by trying to extend web-bing out of the retractor.

B230G02MC-AAT

Child Restraint System Installationon Outboard Rear Seats

OMC039304

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

39

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

39

Page 50: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 50/271

3939

The seat belt pre-tensioner system con-sists mainly of the following components.Their locations are shown in the illustra-tion.

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Seat belt pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly,the seat belt retractor will lock into posi-tion. In certain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seatbelt into tighter contact against theoccupant's body.

Passenger's

airbag

B180D01MC

Driver's airbag 1

23

NOTE:o Both the dr iver' s and f rontpassenger's pre-tensioner seat belts

will be activated in certain frontalcollisions. The pre-tensioner seatbelts can be activated alone or,where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.The pre-tensioners will not be acti-

vated if the seat belts are not beingworn at the time of the collision.

! WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

The seat belt must be work correctly andadjusted to the proper position (seepages 1-25 and 1-26). Please read and

follow all of the important informationand precautions about your vehicle’soccupant safety features – including seatbelts and advanced airbags – that areprovided in this manual.

B180C03MC-AAT

Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped withdriver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts. The purpose of thepre-tensioner is to make sure that theseat belts fit tightly against the occupant'sbody in certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated aloneor, where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.

OED030300

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

40

Page 51: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 51/271

40

!

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to op-

erate only one time. After activation,pre-tensioner seat belts must bereplaced. All seat belts, of any type,should always be replaced after theyhave been worn during a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assem-bly mechanisms become hot duringactivation. Do not touch the pre-

tensioner seat belt assemblies forseveral minutes after they have beenactivated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replacethe pre-tensioner seat belts your-self. This must be done by an autho-rized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repairthe pre-tensioner seat belt system inany manner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies, andfailure to heed the warnings to notstrike, modify, inspect, replace, ser-vice or repair the pre-tensioner seat

belt assemblies may lead to improp-er operation or inadvertent activa-tion and serious injury.

o Always wear the seat belts whendriving or riding in a motor vehicle.

o If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seatbelt must be discarded, contact anauthorized HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING:

CAUTION:o The sensor that activates the SRSairbag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt. The SRS airbagwarning light on the instrumentpanel will illuminate for approximately6 seconds after the ignition key hasbeen turned to the "ON" position,

and then it should turn off.o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is notworking properly, this warning lightwill illuminate even if there is no mal-function of the SRS airbag.

!

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts

are activated, a loud noise may beheard and fine dust, which may ap-pear to be smoke, may be visible inthe passenger compartment. Theseare normal operating conditions andare not hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should

not be breathed for prolonged peri-ods. Wash your hands and face thor-oughly after an accident in which thepre-tensioner seat belts were acti-vated.

If the SRS airbag warning light doesnot illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, re-mains illuminated after approxi-mately 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, orif it illuminates while the vehicle isbeing driven, have an authorizedHyundai dealer inspect the advancedSRS airbag system as soon as pos-sible.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

41

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

41ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

Page 52: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 52/271

41

B240D01MC-AAT

(If Installed)

( ) ( )

1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airbag3. Side impact airbag4. Curtain airbag

B240D01MC

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

42

Page 53: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 53/271

B240A01MC

The purpose of the SRS is to provide the

vehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficient sever-ity. The SRS uses sensors to gather infor-mation about the driver's and frontpassenger's seat position, the driver's andfront passenger's seat belt usage and

impact severity.

The driver's and front passenger's seattrack position sensors (If Installed), whichare installed on the seat track, determineif the seats are fore or aft of a referenceposition. The seat belt buckle sensorsdetermine if the driver and front

passenger's seat belts are fastened.These sensors provide the ability to con-trol the SRS deployment based on howclose the driver's seat is to the steeringwheel, how close the passenger's seat isto the instrument panel, whether or notthe seat belts are fastened, and howsevere the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to

control the airbag inflation with two lev-els. A first stage level is provided formoderate-severity impacts. A secondstage level is provided for more severeimpacts.

According to the impact severity, seatingposition and seat belt usage, the

SRSCM(SRS Control Module) controlsthe airbag inflation. Failure to properlywear seat belts can increase the risk orseverity of injury in an accident.

Additionally, your Hyundai is equippedwith an occupant classification system inthe front passenger's seat. The occupant

classification system detects the pres-ence of a passenger in the frontpassenger's seat and will turn off the frontpassenger's airbag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "Occupant Clas-sification System" later in this section.

B240A03NF-AAT

Driver's and Passenger's FrontAirbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with an ad-

vanced Supplemental Restraint (Airbag)System and lap/shoulder belts at both thedriver and passenger seating positions.The indications of the system's presenceare the letters "SRS AIRBAG" embossedon the airbag pad cover in the steeringwheel and the passenger's side frontpanel pad above the glove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbagsinstalled under the pad covers in thecenter of the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel above theglove box.

Driver's Front Airbag

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

43

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

43

Page 54: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 54/271

! WARNING:If a seat track position sensor or anoccupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warn-ing light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the SRS airbagwarning light is connected with the seat

track position sensor and the occupantclassification system. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, remains illuminated after ap-proximately 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is being

driven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the advanced SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

AIRBAG

! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure

can adversely affect the seat track position sensor and cause the airbagto deploy at a different level thanshould be provided.

o Do not place any objects underneath

the front seats as they could dam-age the seat track position sensor orinterfere with the occupant classifi-cation system.

o Do not place any objects that maycause magnetic fields near the frontseat. These may cause a malfunc-tion of the seat track position sen-

sor.

NOTE:

o Be sure to read information aboutthe SRS on the labels provided onthe topside of the sun visor.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help pro-vide enhanced occupant protectionin frontal crashes. Front airbags arenot intended to deploy in collisions in

which sufficient protection can beprovided by the pre-tensioner seatbelt.

o If you are considering modificationof your vehicle due to a disability,please contact the Hyundai Cus-tomer Assistance Center at 1-800-633-5151.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

44

Page 55: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 55/271

! WARNING:o Move your seat as far back as prac-

tical from the front airbags, while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.

o Never sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the front or side airbags.

o Never lean against the door or cen-

ter console – always sit in an uprightposition.o Do not allow an adult passenger to

ride in the front seat when the “Pas-senger Airbag OFF” indicator is illu-minated, because the airbag will notdeploy in the event of a moderate orsevere frontal crash.

o Never place objects over or nearany airbag module (front or side im-pact airbags), because these objectscan injure passengers in a crash.

o Never place covers, blankets oraftermarket seat warmers on thepassenger seat as these may inter-fere with the occupant classificationsystem.

! WARNING:Always use seat belts and child restraints– every trip, every time, everyone!Airbags inflate with considerable forceand in the blink of an eye. Seat belts helpkeep occupants in proper position toobtain maximum benefit from the airbag.

Even with advanced airbags, improp-erly and unbelted occupants can be se-verely injured when the airbag inflates.Always follow the precautions about seatbelts, airbags and occupant safety con-tained in this manual.

To reduce the chance of serious or fatal

injuries and receive the maximum safetybenefit from your restraint system:o Never place a child in any child or

booster seat in the front seat (seechild restraints 1-31).

o ABC – Always Buckle Children in theback seat. It is the safest place forchildren of any age to ride.

o Front and side impact airbags caninjure occupants improperly posi-tioned in the front seats.

! WARNING:o Do not tamper or disconnect SRS

wiring or other components. Injuriescould result from inadvertent deploy-ment or failure of the airbag to de-ploy in a crash.

o If the SRS airbag warning light (see

pg 1-64) remains illuminated whilethe vehicle is being driven, have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspectthe airbag system as soon as pos-sible.

o Airbags can only be used once –have an authorized Hyundai dealerreplace the airbag immediately after

deployment.o The SRS is designed to deploy thefront airbags only when an impact issufficiently severe and when the im-pact angle is within a range as mea-sured from the forward longitudinalaxis of the vehicle. The front airbagswill not deploy in side, rear or rollover

impacts. Additionally, the airbags willonly deploy once. Seat belts must beworn at all times.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

45

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

45

Page 56: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 56/271

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or

near the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is in

a crash severe enough to cause theairbags to deploy.o If the airbags deploy, they must be

replaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Deployed airbags WILL NOTinflate again and will provide no pro-tection in subsequent collisions.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect

SRS wiring or other components ofthe SRS system. Doing so couldresult in injury, due to accidentaldeployment of the airbags or by ren-dering the SRS inoperative.

o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger seatposition. A child restraint systemmust never be placed in the frontseat.

An infant or child could be severelyinjured or killed by an airbag deploy-ment in case of an accident.

o Children younger than 13 years mustalways be properly restrained in therear seat. Never allow children to

ride in the front passenger seat. If achild over 13 must be seated in thefront seat, he or she must be prop-erly belted and the seat should bemoved as far back as possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants in-cluding the driver should always wear

their seat belts whether or not anairbag is also provided at their seat-ing position to minimize the risk ofsevere injury or death in the event ofa crash. Do not sit or lean unneces-sarily close to the airbag while thevehicle is in motion.

! WARNING:! WARNING:

B240A02MC

Rear impact

Side Impact

Rollover

o Front airbags are not intended todeploy in side-impact, rear-impactor rollover crashes. In addition, frontairbags will not deploy in frontalcrashes below the deploymentthreshold.

o Move your seat as far back as prac-tical from the front airbags, while stillmaintaining control of the vehicle.You and your passengers shouldnever sit or lean unnecessarily closeto the airbags. Improperly positioneddrivers and passengers can be se-verely injured by inflating airbags.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

46

Page 57: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 57/271

B240B02MC-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following compo-nents:

1. Front Impact Sensor2. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator

(Front passenger's seat only)3. SRS "AIR BAG" warning light4. Knee Bolster5. Passenger's Airbag Module6. Driver's Airbag Module7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)8. Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)9. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat

Track Position Sensors (If Installed)

B240B01NF

10. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat

Belt Buckle Sensors11. Side Impact Sensor (If Installed)12. Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies13. Side Impact Airbag Module (If Installed)14. Curtain Airbag Module (If Installed)

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position

can result in serious or fatal injury ina crash. All occupants should situpright with the seat back in an up-right position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legs

comfortably extended and their feeton the floor until the vehicle is parkedand the ignition key is removed.

o The SRS airbag system must deployvery rapidly to provide protection ina crash. If an occupant is out ofposition because of not wearing aseat belt, the airbag may forcefully

contact the occupant causing seri-ous or fatal injuries.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

47

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

47

Page 58: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 58/271

The SRSCM continually monitors all ele-

ments while the ignition is "ON" to deter-mine if a frontal or near-frontal impact issevere enough to require airbag deploy-ment or pre-tensioner seat belt deploy-ment.

The SRS "AIR BAG" warning light on theinstrument panel will illuminate for about

6 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position or after the engine isstarted, after which the "AIR BAG" warn-ing light should go out.

B240B01L

Upon deployment, tear seams moldeddirectly into the pad covers will separateunder pressure from the expansion of theairbags. Further opening of the coversthen allows full inflation of the airbags.

The airbag modules are located both inthe center of the steering wheel and in thefront passenger's panel above the glovebox. When the SRSCM detects a suffi-ciently severe impact to the front of thevehicle, it will automatically deploy the

front airbags.

B240B02L

A fully inflated airbag, in combination witha properly worn seat belt, slows the driver'sor the passenger's forward motion, re-ducing the risk of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag imme-diately starts deflating, enabling the driverto maintain forward visibility and the abil-ity to steer or operate other controls.

B240B03L

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

48

Page 59: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 59/271

!

Passenger's Front Airbag

B240B05L

o When installing a container of liquidair freshener inside the vehicle, donot place it near the instrument clus-ter nor on the instrument panel sur-face. If there is any leakage from theair freshener onto these areas (in-strument cluster, instrument panelor air ventilator), it may damage these

parts. If the liquid from the air fresh-ener does leak onto these areas,wash them with water immediately.

WARNING:o If an airbag deploys, there may be a

loud noise followed by a fine dustreleased in the vehicle. These con-ditions are normal and are not haz-ardous - the airbags are packed inthis fine powder. The dust generated

during airbag deployment may causeskin or eye irritation as well as ag-gravate asthma for some persons.Always wash all exposed skin areasthoroughly with lukewarm water anda mild soap after an accident in whichthe airbags were deployed.

o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. Ifthe SRS "AIR BAG" warning lightdoes not illuminate, or continuouslyremains on after illuminating forabout 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, orafter the engine is started, comes onwhile driving, the SRS is not working

properly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle immediately inspected byyour Hyundai dealer.

Passenger's Front Airbag

CAUTION:o Do not install or place any accesso-

ries (drink holder, cassette holder,sticker, etc.) on the front passenger'spanel above the glove box in a ve-hicle with a passenger's airbag. Suchobjects may become dangerous pro-jectiles and cause injury if thepassenger's airbag inflates.

!

B240B01MC-A

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

49

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

49

Page 60: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 60/271

!o Before you replace a fuse or discon-

nect a battery terminal, turn the igni-tion key to the "LOCK" position andremove the ignition key. Never re-move or replace the airbag relatedfuse(s) when the ignition key is in the

"ON" position. Failure to heed thiswarning will cause the SRS "AIRBAG" warning light to illuminate.

WARNING:

If the front passenger seat is occupied bya person that the system determines to beof adult size, and he/she sits properly(sitting upright with the seatback in an

upright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legs com-fortably extended and their feet on thefloor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will be turned off and the frontpassenger's airbag will be able to inflate,if necessary, in frontal crashes.You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicator on the center facia panel.The following table summarizes the func-tioning of the system depending on thefront passenger seat occupant.

OMC029200N

B990A03MC-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYS-TEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an occu-pant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat. The Occupant Classi-fication system is designed to detect thepresence of a properly-seated front pas-senger and determine if the passenger'sfront airbag should be enabled (may in-flate) or not. The driver's front airbag isnot affected or controlled by the Occu-pant Classification System.

Main components of occupant clas-sification system

o A detection device located within thefront passenger seat cushion.

o Electronic system to determine whetherpassenger airbag systems (both frontand side) should be activated or deac-tivated.

o A warning light located on the instru-ment panel which illuminates the words"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicat-ing the front passenger airbag systemis deactivated.

o The instrument panel airbag warninglight is interconnected with the occu-pant classification system.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

50

Page 61: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 61/271

When an adult is seated in the frontpassenger seat, if the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator is on, turn the ignitionkey to "LOCK" and ask the passenger to

sit properly (sitting upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered onthe seat cushion with their seat belt on,legs comfortably extended and their feeton the floor). Restart the engine and havethe person remain in that position forabout 30 seconds.This will allow the system to detect the

person and to enable the passengerairbag. If the "PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF" indicator is still on, turn the ignitionkey to "LOCK" and ask the passenger tosit properly and restart the engine again.If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is still on, ask the passenger tomove to the rear seat.

Proper seating position

B990A01O

*1) The system judges a person of adultsize as an adult. When a smaller adultsits in the front passenger seat, thesystem may recognize him/her as a

child depending on his/her physiqueand posture.*2) Do not allow children to ride in the

front passenger seat. When a largerchild who has outgrown a child re-straint system sits in the front passen-ger seat, the system may recognizehim/her as an adult depending on his/

her physique or posture, or objects inthe lap of the child.*3) Never install a child restraint system

on the front passenger seat.

Condition and operation in the front pas-

senger occupant classification system

Frontpassenger

airbag

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Conditiondetected by

the occupantclassification

system1. Adult* 1

2. Child* 2 orchild restraintsystem* 3

3. Unoccupied

SRSwarning

light

Off

Off

Off

"PASSEN-GER AIR

BAG OFF"indicator light

Off

On

On

Always be sure that you and all vehicle

occupants are seated and restrained prop-erly (sitting upright with the seat in anupright position, centered on the seatcushion, with the person’s legs comfort-ably extended, feet on the floor, andwearing the safety belt properly) for themost effective protection by the air bagand the safety belt.

o The OCS may not function properly ifthe passenger takes actions which candefeat the detection system. Theseinclude:(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.(2) Leaning against the door or center

console.

(3) Sitting towards the sides or the frontof the seat.(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or

resting them on other locationswhich reduce the passenger weighton the front seat.

(5) Improperly wearing the safety belt.(6) Reclining the seatback.

Page 62: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 62/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

52

Page 63: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 63/271

! WARNING: !! WARNING:o A smaller-stature adult who is not

seated correctly (for example: seatexcessively reclined, leaning on thedoor or center console, or hips shiftedforward in the seat) can cause acondition where the advanced fron-

tal airbag system senses less weightthan if the occupant were seatedproperly (sitting upright with theseatback in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably ex-tended and their feet on the floor).This condition can result in an adult

potentially being misclassified andillumination of the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator.

B990A05O

- NEVER place feet on the dash-

board.

WARNING:o Do not allow an adult passenger to

ride in the front seat when the “PAS-SENGER AIR BAG OFF” indicator isilluminated, because the airbag willnot deploy in the event of a crash. Ifthe "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator remains illuminated afterthe passenger repositions them-selves properly and the car is re-started, Hyundai recommends thatpassenger move to the rear seatbecause the passenger's frontairbag will not deploy.

o The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator will not change accordingto the occupants posture after thevehicle has been running for 30 sec-onds. Front seat passengers muststay properly seated to avoid seri-ous injury from a deploying airbag.For more information see page 1-49.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

53

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

53

Page 64: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 64/271

! WARNING:If the occupant classification system isnot working properly, the SRS airbagwarning light on the instrument panelwill illuminate because the passenger'sfront airbags are connected with theoccupant classification system. If thereis a malfunction of the occupant classi-fication system, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will not illuminateand the passenger's front airbags willinflate in frontal impact crashes even ifthere is no occupant in the frontpassenger's seat. If the SRS airbagwarning light does not illuminate whenthe ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, remains illuminated after ap-proximately 6 seconds when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, or if itilluminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classifica-tion system and the SRS airbag system

as soon as possible.

NOTE:The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator illuminates for about 4 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position or after the engine isstarted. If the front passenger seat isoccupied, the occupant classificationsensor will then classify the front pas-senger within approximately 10 secondsafter the ignition is turned on.

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the occupation classificationsystem, never install a child restraintsystem in the front passenger's seat.A deploying airbag can forcefullystrike a child resulting in seriousinjuries or death. Any child under 13years of age should ride in the rearseat. Children too large for childrestraints should use the availablelap/shoulder belts. No matter whattype of crash, children of all ages aresafer when restrained in the rearseat.

o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator is illuminated when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by anadult and he/she sits properly (sit-ting upright with the seatback in anupright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feet

on the floor), have that person sit inthe rear seat.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

54

Page 65: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 65/271

B990B02MC-AAT

Side Impact Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with a sideimpact airbag in each front seat. The

purpose of the airbag is to provide thevehicle's driver and/or the front passen-ger with additional protection than thatoffered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deployonly during certain side-impact collisions,depending on the crash severity, angle,speed and point of impact. The side im-

pact airbags are not designed to deployin all side impact situations.

B990B02LZ

! WARNING:o If you change the weight on the front

passenger seat just after sit-in orrestart of the engine, the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator may beturned on or off for a few seconds,disabling or enabling the passenger

airbags. After the initial stage of about30 seconds, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator will not toggle.

o Do not modify or replace the frontpassenger seat. Don't place anythingon or attach anything such as a blan-ket or after market seat heater to thefront passenger seat. This can ad-

versely affect the occupant classifi-cation system.o Do not sit on sharp objects such as

tools when occupying the front pas-senger seat. This can adversely af-fect the occupant classification sys-tem.

o Do not use accessory seat covers

on the front seats.

! WARNING:o Accident statistics show that chil-

dren are safer if they are restrainedin the rear, as opposed to the frontseat. It is recommended that childrestraints be secured in a rear seat,including an infant riding in a rear-

facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an olderchild riding in a booster seat.

o Airbags can only be used once –have an authorized Hyundai dealerreplace the airbag immediately afterdeployment.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

55

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

55

Page 66: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 66/271

WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supple-

mental to the driver's and thepassenger's seat belt systems andis not a substitute for them. There-fore your seat belts must be worn atall times while the vehicle is in mo-

tion. The airbags deploy only in cer-tain side impact conditions severeenough to cause significant injury tothe vehicle occupants.

o For best protection from the sideimpact airbag system and to avoidbeing injured by the deploying sideimpact airbag, both front seat occu-

pants should sit in an upright posi-tion with the seat belt properly fas-tened. The driver's hands should beplaced on the steering wheel at the9:00 and 3:00 positions. Thepassenger's arms and hands shouldbe placed on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat cov-

ers.Use of seat covers could reduce orprevent the effectiveness of the sys-tem.

!

B990B01MC

Side impact sensor

Important Safety Notes on the SideImpact Airbag System

Following are a number of safety points

concerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.

!o Do not install any accessories on theside or near the side impact airbag.

o Do not place any objects over theairbag or between the airbag andyourself.

o Do not place any objects (an um-brella, bag, etc.) between the frontdoor and the front seat. Such objectsmay become dangerous projectilesand cause injury if the supplementalside impact airbag inflates.

o To prevent unexpected deploymentof the side impact airbag that mayresult in personal injury, avoid im-

pact to the side impact sensor whenthe ignition key is on.

WARNING:

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

56

B990C01JM GAT

Page 67: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 67/271

! WARNING:o The space between the occupant and

the curtain airbag must never beoccupied by children, passengers orpets. Occupants should never leanout or have any parts of their bodyprotruding from the window while theengine is running.

o Do not move the sun visor out tocover the side window if there is anitem attached to it such as a garagedoor remote control, pens, air fresh-eners or the like. These objects couldcause injury if the Curtain Airbag isdeployed.

o Do not install sun blinds to the reardoors, these must not obstruct orimpair the airbag in any way.

o Do not install any accessories orchildren’s toys in the Curtain Airbagdeployment zones, as this may im-pair the operation of the system orthrow parts of them into the vehiclecabin causing injury to occupants ifthe system is deployed.

B990C01JM-GAT

Curtain Airbag

Curtain airbags are located along bothsides of the roof rails above the front and

rear doors. They are designed to helpprotect the heads of the front seat occu-pants and the rear outboard seat occu-pants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain airbags are designed to de-ploy only during certain side impact col-lisions, depending on the crash severity,

angle, speed and impact. The curtainairbags are not designed to deploy in allside impact situations, collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in mostrollover situations.

B990C01MC

Curtain Airbag

! WARNING:o Before installing child restraints ,always refer to “Child Restraint Sys-tem” section to ensure correct in-stallation and that occupant protec-tion is maximized.

o Make sure that the occupant doesnot have any body parts (head, arms

& legs) protruding outside the re-straining system. An inflating airbagthat strikes an infant or child couldcause serious injury.

o Ensure the opening for the CurtainAirbag System remains unob-structed at all times, so that theairbags can inflate properly if needed.

Important Safety Notes for Curtain

Airbag SystemsFollowing are a number of safety pointsconcerning this system which should al-ways be observed to ensure risk of injuryis reduced in an accident.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

57

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

57

B240C02NF AAT

Page 68: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 68/271

B240C02NF-AAT

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-freeand so there are no parts you can safelyservice by yourself. If the SRS "AIR BAG"warning light does not illuminate, or con-tinuously remains on, have your vehicleimmediately inspected by your Hyundaidealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such asremoving, installing, repairing, or any workon the steering wheel must be performedby a qualified Hyundai technician. Im-proper handling of the SRS system mayresult in serious personal injury.

HSM393

! WARNING:o To maintain the integrity of the Cur-

tain Airbag system, any work, re-moval or installation of the airbagand associated components (suchas roof lining and side trims) shouldonly be performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint sys-

tem in the front passenger seat po-sition.A child restraint system must neverbe placed in the front seat. The infantor child could be severely injured byan airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Modification to SRS components orwiring, including the addition of anykind of badges to the pad covers ormodifications to the body structure,can adversely affect SRS perfor-mance and lead to possible injury.

o For cleaning the airbag pad covers,use only a soft, dry cloth or onewhich has been moistened with plainwater. Solvents or cleaners couldadversely affect the airbag coversand proper deployment of the sys-tem.

!

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

58

B240D02NF-AAT

Page 69: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 69/271

B240D02NF AAT

Additional Safety Precautions

o Never let passengers ride in thecargo area (trunk) or on top of afolded-down back seat. All occupantsshould sit upright, fully back in theirseats with their seat belts on and theirfeet on the floor.

o Passengers should not move out of

or change seats while the vehicle ismoving. A passenger who is not wear-ing a seat belt during a crash or emer-gency stop can be thrown against theinside of the vehicle, against otheroccupants, or out of the vehicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to re-strain one occupant. If more than one

person uses the same seat belt, theycould be seriously injured or killed ina collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve oc-cupant comfort or reposition the seatbelt can reduce the protection pro-vided by the seat belt and increase the

chance of serious injury in a crash.o Passengers should not place hard or

sharp objects between themselvesand the airbags. Carrying hard orsharp objects on your lap or in yourmouth can result in injuries if an airbaginflates.

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or

near the airbag modules on the steer-ing wheel, instrument panel, and thefront passenger's panel above theglove box, because any such objectcould cause harm if the vehicle is in

a crash severe enough to cause theairbags to inflate.o If the airbags inflate, they must be

replaced by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnectSRS wiring, or other components ofthe SRS system. Doing so could re-

sult in injury, due to accidental infla-tion of the airbags or by renderingthe SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag systemmust be discarded, or if the vehiclemust be scrapped, certain safetyprecautions must be observed. YourHyundai dealer knows these precau-

tions and can give you the neces-sary information. Failure to followthese precautions and procedurescould increase the risk of personalinjury.

! WARNING:o If your car was flooded and has

soaked carpeting or there is wateron the floor, do not start the engine;have the car towed to an authorizedHyundai dealer.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

59

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

59

o Keep occupants away from the airbag Adding Equipment to or Modifying

Page 70: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 70/271

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position

can cause occupants to be shiftedtoo close to a deploying airbag, strikethe interior structure or be thrownfrom the vehicle resulting in seriousinjury or death.

o Always sit upright with the seatback in an upright position, centered onthe seat cushion with your seat belton, legs comfortably extended andyour feet on the floor.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit up-right, fully back in their seats with theirseat belts on and their feet on the floor.If occupants are too close to the airbagcovers, they could be injured if theairbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on ornear the airbag covers. Any objectattached to or placed on the front orside impact airbag covers could inter-fere with the proper operation of theairbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modi-fication of the front seats could inter-fere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing com-

ponents or side impact airbags.o Do not place items under the frontseats. Placing items under the frontseats could interfere with the opera-tion of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components and wiringharnesses.

o Never hold an infant or child on your

lap. The infant or child could be seri-ously injured or killed in the event of acrash. All infants and children shouldbe properly restrained in appropriatechild safety seats or seat belts in therear seat.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying

Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle.If you modify your vehicle by changingyour vehicle's frame, bumper system, frontend or side sheet metal or ride height, thismay adversely affect the operation of yourvehicle's airbag system.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

60 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A02MC-AAT

Page 71: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 71/271

OMC029505N

Type A

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

61

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

61

Page 72: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 72/271

1. Tachometer

2. Turn Signal Indicator Lights3. High Beam Indicator Light4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light

(If Installed)5. Odometer/Trip Odometer/Trip Computer (If Installed)6. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (Automatic transaxle only)7. Speedometer8. Check Fuel Cap Warning Light

9. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)10. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)

11. Door Ajar Warning Light

12. Charging System Warning Light

13. Parking Brake/Low Brake fluid Level Warning Light14. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light15. Seat Belt Warning Light16. ECO Indicator (If Installed)17. Fuel Gauge18. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light19. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light20. Low Fuel Warning Light21. Trunk Lid/Tail Gate Open Warning Light22. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)23. ABS Service Reminder Indicator Light (If Installed)24. Cruise Control Indicator Lights (If Installed)

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

62

B260B02MC-AAT

Page 73: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 73/271

OMC029510N

Type B

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

63

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

63

Page 74: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 74/271

12. Door Ajar Warning Light13. Charging System Warning Light14. Parking Brake/Low Brake fluid Level Warning Light15. Seat Belt Warning Light16. High Beam Indicator Light17. ECO Indicator (If Installed)18. Fuel Gauge19. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light20. Overdrive Off Indicator Light (Automatic transaxle only)

21. Low Fuel Warning Light22. Trunk Lid/Tail Gate Open Warning Light23. ABS Service Reminder Indicator Light (If Installed)24. Cruise Control Indicator Lights (If Installed)

1. Tachometer2. Turn Signal Indicator Lights3. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light4. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light

(If Installed)5. Odometer/Trip Odometer6. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light7. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)8. Speedometer

9. Check Fuel Cap Warning Light10. Low Tire Pressure Telltale (If Installed)11. TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)

Malfunction Indicator (If Installed)

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

64 WARNING AND INDICATORLIGHTS

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service Reminder IndiB260C01A-AAT

O/D OFF IndicatorB260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

Page 75: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 75/271

!

ABS Service Reminder Indi-cator (SRI) (If Installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" posi-tion, the Anti-Lock Brake System SRI willcome on and then go off in a few seconds.If the ABS SRI remains on, comes onwhile driving, or does not come on whenthe key is turned to the "ON" position, this

indicates that there may be a problemwith the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby your Hyundai dealer as soon as pos-sible. The normal braking system will stillbe operational, but without the assis-tance of the anti-lock brake system.

WARNING:If both ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brakefluid level warning lights remain "ON" orcome on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D. (Electronic BrakeForce Distribution).

If this occurs, avoid sudden stops andhave your vehicle checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

O/D OFF Indicator(Automatic Transaxle only)

When the overdrive switch is turned on,the overdrive off indicator will go out. Thisamber indicator will be illuminated whenthe overdrive switch is turned off.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal IndicatorLights

The blinking green arrow on the instru-ment panel shows the direction indicatedby the turn signals. If the arrow comes onbut does not blink, blinks more rapidlythan normal, or does not blink at all, amalfunction in the turn signal system isindicated. Your dealer should be con-sulted for repairs.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes onwhenever the headlights are switched tothe high beam or flash position.

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

The SRS warning light comes on forapproximately 6 seconds after the key isturned to the "ON" position or after theengine is started, after which it will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is

not working properly. If the AIR BAG warn-ing light does not come on, or continu-ously remains on after operating for about6 seconds when you turned the ignitionkey to the "ON" position or started theengine, or if it comes on while driving,have the SRS inspected by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

65

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

65

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure WarningB260H03A-AAT

Parking Brake/D150312AUN

Automatic Transaxle Position

Page 76: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 76/271

Low Oil Pressure WarningLight

CAUTION:If the oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious en-gine damage may result. The oil pres-

sure warning light comes on wheneverthere is insufficient oil pressure. In nor-mal operation, it should come on whenthe ignition switch is turned on, then goout when the engine is started. If the oilpressure warning light stays on whilethe engine is running, there is a seriousmalfunction.If this happens, stop the car as soon asit is safe to do so, turn off the engine andcheck the oil level. If the oil level is low,fill the engine oil to the proper level andstart the engine again. If the light stayson with the engine running, turn the en-gine off immediately. In any instancewhere the oil light stays on when theengine is running, the engine should bechecked by a Hyundai dealer before thecar is driven again.

!

Parking Brake/ Low Brake Fluid LevelWarning Light

CAUTION:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer as

soon as possible. Driving your car witha problem in either the brake electricalsystem or brake hydraulic system isdangerous, and could result in seriousinjury or death.

!

Warning Light OperationThe parking brake/brake fluid level warn-ing light should come on when the park-ing brake is applied and the ignition switchis turned to "ON" or "START". After theengine is started, the light should go outwhen the parking brake is released.

If the parking brake is not applied, thewarning light should come on when theignition switch is turned to "ON" or"START", then go out when the enginestarts.

Automatic Transaxle PositionIndicator Light (If Installed)

The indicator displays which automatictransaxle shift position is selected.

Manual Transaxle Shift Indi-cator (If Installed)

This indicator informs you which gear isdesired while driving to save fuel.

For example:: Indicates that shifting up to the 3rd

gear is desired (currently the shiftlever is in the 2nd gear).

: Indicates that shifting down to the3rd gear is desired (currently theshift lever is in the 4th gear).

NOTE :When the system is not working prop-erly, up & down arrow indicator will blink (Gear is not displayed.).

Page 77: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 77/271

Page 78: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 78/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

68

B260W02JM-AAT

Low Tire Pressure TelltaleD150325AMC

Cruise Indicator (If Installed)

Page 79: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 79/271

! WARNING:Significantly low tire pressure makesthe vehicle unstable and can contributeto loss of vehicle control and increasedbraking distances.Continued driving on low pressure tireswill cause the tires to overheat and fail.

(If Installed)The low tire pressure telltale comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position.If the warning light does not come on, orcontinuously remains on after commingon for about 3 seconds when you turned

the ignition key to the "ON" position, theTire Pressure Monitoring System is notworking properly. If this occurs, have yourvehicle checked by an authorizedHyundai dealer as soon as possible.This warning light will also illuminate oneor more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. You should stop and check your

tires as soon as possible. If the warninglight illuminates while driving, reduce ve-hicle speed immediately and stop thevehicle.Avoid hard braking and overcorrecting atthe steering wheel. Inflate the tires to theproper pressure as indicated on thevehicle’s tire information placard.

( )

CRUISE Indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise control system is enabled.The cruise indicator light in the instru-ment cluster is illuminated when the cruisecontrol ON/OFF button on the steering

wheel is pushed.The indicator light turns off when thecruise control ON/OFF button is pushedagain. For more Information about theuse of cruise control, refer to page 1-103.

Cruise SET Indicator

The indicator light illuminates when thecruise function switch (-/SET or RES/+) isON.The cruise SET indicator light in the in-strument cluster is illuminated when thecruise control switch (-/SET or RES/+) ispushed. The cruise SET indicator lightdoes not illuminate when the cruise con-trol switch (CANCEL) is pushed or thesystem is disengaged.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

69

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

69

B265W01MC-AAT

TPMS (Tire Pressure Moni-D150340AMC-EU

ECO Indicator (If Installed)B270A01A-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING

Page 80: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 80/271

!

(toring System) MalfunctionIndicator (If Installed)

TPMS malfunction indicator comes on for3 seconds after the ignition key is turnedto the "ON" position. If the warning lightdoes not come on, or continuously re-mains on after comming on for about 3seconds when you turned the ignition keyto the "ON" position, the Tire PressureMonitoring System is not working porperly.If this occurs, have your vehicle checkedby an authorized Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.The warning light also comes on andstays on when there is a problem with theTire Pressure Monitoring System.If this happens, the system may not moni-tor the tire pressure. Have the systemchecked by an authorized Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

WARNING:o The TPMS cannot alert you to severeand sudden tire damage caused byexternal factors.

o If you feel any vehicle instability, im-mediately take your foot off the ac-celerator, apply the brakes gradu-ally and with light force, and slowly

move to a safe position off the road.

( )

The ECO indicator is displayed to helpyou improve fuel efficiency when you aredriving.o The ECO indicator (green) will turn on

when you drive fuel efficiently in theECO ON mode. If you don't want the

indicator displayed, you can turn theECO ON mode to OFF mode by press-ing the TRIP button.

o The indicator will turn off when thesystem is not working properly in theECO ON mode.

o The fuel efficiency depends on thedriver's driving habit and road condi-

tion.o The system stops operating when the

transaxle is in the P (Park), R (Re-verse), N (Neutral) position.

ECO

! WARNING:Don't keep watching the indicator whiledriving. It will distract you and cause anaccident that results in severe personalinjury.

SOUNDThe front disc brake pads have wearindicators that should make a high-pitchedsquealing or scraping noise when newpads are needed. The sound may comeand go or be heard all the time when thevehicle is moving. It may also be heard

when the brake pedal is pushed downfirmly. Expensive rotor damage will resultif the worn pads are not replaced. Seeyour Hyundai dealer immediately.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

70

B330A03A-AAT

TACHOMETERB300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B280A02TG-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

Page 81: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 81/271

The tachometer registers the speed ofyour engine in revolutions per minute

(rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be increased tosuch a speed that the needle enters thered zone on the tachometer face. This

can cause severe engine damage andmay void your warranty.

!

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibratedin miles per hour (on the outer scale) andkilometers per hour (on the inner scale).

OMC029513N

The needle on the gauge indicates theapproximate fuel level in the fuel tank.The fuel capacity is given in Section 9.

NOTE:The " " symbol means the fuel fillerlid is placed on the left side of the vehicle.

OMC029420K

Type A Type B

OMC029512N

CAUTION:Avoid driving with a very low fuel level. Ifyou run out of fuel, it could cause theengine to misfire and result in excessiveloading of the catalytic converter.

!

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

71

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

71

B310B01O-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER 2. Trip Odometer Type A

Page 82: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 82/271

(Without Trip Computer)

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total drivingdistance in miles, and is useful for keep-ing a record for maintenance intervals.It is normal for a new vehicle to have theodometer indicating less than 30 miles.

NOTE:

Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the number of the odometer. Thealteration may void your warranty cov-erage.

B310B01MC-A

Type A

Type B

Pushing in the trip switch for less than 1second when the ignition switch is turned"ON" displays the following sequence:

OMC029054

B310B02MC-A

B310B03MC-A

Type B

Trip odometer records the distance of 2trips in miles.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

72

B310C01O-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETERo TRIP A: Distance you have traveled

from your origination point toType B

Page 83: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 83/271

(With Trip Computer)

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total drivingdistance in miles, and is useful for keep-ing a record for maintenance intervals.It is normal for a new vehicle to have theodometer indicating less than 30 miles.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent tochange the number of the odometer. Thealteration may void your warranty cov-erage.

B400B03MC-E

Trip Odometer

Odometer

a first destination.o TRIP B: Distance from the first desti-

nation to the final destination.

When the trip switch is pressed for morethan 1 second, trip odometer will reset to0.

o ECO ON/OFF Mode (If Installed)

OMC029514

OMC029515

You can turn the ECO indicator on/off onthe instrument cluster in this mode.If you push the TRIP button more than 1second in the ECO ON mode, ECO OFF

is displayed and the ECO indicator ( )turns off.If you want to display the ECO indicator( ) again, press the TRIP button morethan 1 second in the ECO OFF mode andthen ECO ON mode is displayed.For more detailed explanations, refer to"Warnings and indicator lights" in section

1.

Type A

ECO

ECO

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

73

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

73

2. Trip Odometer

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B01MC-AAT

(If Installed) TRIP Switch

Page 84: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 84/271

o This mode indicates the drive distancetravelled since the last drive time reset.o Refer to the explanation of the trip

computer (see page 1-74, Tripmeter).

B400B01MC-A

The trip computer is a microcomputer-controlled driver information gauge thatdisplays information related to drivingsuch as outside temperature, tripmeter,average fuel consumption and distanceto empty on the LCD.

Outside temperature

Tripmeter

Average fuel consumption

Distance to empty

ECO ON/OFF mode (if installed)

Pushing in the TRIP switch for less than1 second when the ignition switch is in"ON" position changes the display as

follows;

OMC029054

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

74

3. Average Fuel Consumption(MPG)

2. Tripmeter (miles)1. Outside Temperature (°F)

Page 85: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 85/271

( )

B400B04MC-A

o This mode calculates the average fuelconsumption from the total fuel used

and the distance since the last aver-age consumption reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated fromthe fuel consumption input.

o Average fuel consumption is reset tozero (--) if the battery is disconnected.

o To reset the average fuel consumptionto zero (--), press the TRIP switch formore than 1 second.

o When you drive 0.5 mile (0.5 km) andless after resetting, the average fuelconsumption will be displayed to '--'.

Odometer

Average Fuel Consumption

o This mode indicates the total distancetravelled since the last tripmeter reset.Total distance is also reset to zero ifthe battery is disconnected.

o Pressing the TRIP switch for more than1 second when the tripmeter is beingdisplayed clears the tripmeter to zero.

o The meter's working range is from 0 to999.9 miles (999.9 kms).

B400B03MC-E

Odometer

Tripmeter

This mode indicates the outside tem-perature between -40°F (-40°C) and176°F (80°C) .

B400B02MC-A

Odometer

Outside Temperature

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

75

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

75

4. Distance to Empty(miles)

5. ECO ON/OFF Mode (If Installed)

Page 86: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 86/271

o This mode indicates the estimated dis-

tance to empty from the current fuellevel in the fuel tank.o The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.36 gallons(6 liters) of fuel are added to the ve-hicle.

OMC049500

Distance to empty

Odometer o When the distance to empty is lessthan 30 miles (50 km), the distance toempty digits (----) will blink until morefuel is added.

NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ from

the actual tripmeter according todriving conditions.

o The distance to empty can vary ac-cording to the driving conditions, driv-ing pattern or vehicle speed.

B400B06MC-A

You can turn the ECO indicator on/off onthe instrument cluster in this mode.If you push the TRIP button more than 1

second in the ECO ON mode, ECO OFFis displayed and the ECO indicator ( )turns off.If you want to display the ECO indicator( ) again, press the TRIP button morethan 1 second in the ECO OFF mode andthen ECO ON mode is displayed.For more detailed explanations, refer to

"Warnings and indicator lights" in section1.

OMC029514

ECO

ECO

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

76

B340C05A-AAT

Headlight SwitchB340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHTSWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,

Page 87: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 87/271

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel onthe end of the multi-function switch. The firstposition turns on the parking lights, side-lights, tail lights and instrument panel lights.The second position turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

OMC049601

To indicate a lane change, move thelever up or down to a point where itbegins flashing.The lever will automatically return to thecenter position when released.

OMC049600

HEADLIGHT AND LOW-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink.Pushing upward on the lever causes theturn signals on the right side of the car to

blink. As the turn is completed, the leverwill automatically return to the centerposition and turn off the turn signals at thesame time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goeson but does not blink, or does not go onat all, there is a malfunction in the system.Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb orsee your Hyundai dealer.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

77

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

77

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight FlasherB340D01A-AAT

High-Beam SwitchParking Light Auto Off

Th f hi f i

Page 88: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 88/271

To flash the headlights, pull the switchlever toward you, then release it. Theheadlights can be flashed even thoughthe headlight switch is in the "OFF" posi-tion.

OSA049094

o The purpose of this feature is to pre-vent the battery from being discharged.The system automatically turns off theheadlights and parking lights whenthe driver removes the ignition key andopens the driver- side door.

o With this feature, the parklight will beturned off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of road at night.If necessary, to keep the lights onwhen the ignition key is removed, per-form the following :1) Open the driver-side door.2) Turn the parking lights OFF and

ON again using the light switch onthe steering column.

To turn on the headlight high beams,push the lever forward (away from you).

The High Beam Indicator Light will comeon at the same time. For low beams, pullthe lever back toward you.

OSA049093

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

78

B350A01MC-AAT

Windshield Wiper

WINDSHIELD WIPER/WASHER SWITCH

A : Wiper speed control· MIST – Single wipeOFF Off

Windshield wiper/washer

Page 89: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 89/271

OMC048902N

(A)

(B)

(C)

The windshield wiper switch has threepositions:

A) Intermittent wiper operationB) Low-speed operationC) High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system,do not attempt to wipe away heavy accu-mulations of snow or ice. Accumulatedsnow and ice should be removed manu-ally. If there is only a light layer of snowor ice, operate the heater in the defrostmode to melt the snow or ice beforeusing the wiper.

Rear window wiper/washer(If Installed)

· OFF – Off· INT – Intermittent wipe· LO – Low wiper speed· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent wipe time adjustment

C : Wash with brief wipes

D : Rear wiper/washer control· – Wash with brief wipes· ON – Continuous wipe· OFF – Off

OSA049904

OMC048901N

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

79

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

79

B350B01A-AAT

Windshield Washer Operation Mist Wiper OperationNOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than

15 seconds at a time or when the

Page 90: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 90/271

To use the windshield washer, pull thewiper/washer lever toward the steeringwheel.When the washer lever is operated, thewipers automatically make three passesacross the windshield. The washer con-tinues to operate until the lever is re-leased.

OMC048903N

OMC048904N

If a single wipe is desired in mist, movethe windshield wiper and washer controllever up.

15 seconds at a time or when thefluid reservoir is empty.o In icy or freezing weather, be sure

the wiper blades are not frozen to theglass prior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in win-ter, use windshield washer antifreeze.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

80

B390A01MC-AAT

Rear Window Wiper and Washer

(If Installed)

INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AATB350C01MC-GAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Op-

eration

Page 91: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 91/271

(If Installed)

1. : The washer fluid will be sprayed

onto the rear window and the wiperoperates while the rear windowwiper barrel is placed in this posi-tion.

2.ON : The rear window wiper starts tooperate continuously.

3.OFF

The instrument panel lights can be madebrighter or dimmer by turning the instru-ment panel light control knob.

B410A01MC

OSA049905

To use the intermittent wiper feature, placethe wiper switch in the "INT" position. Withthe switch in this position, the intervalbetween wipes can be varied from ap-proximately 1 to 15 seconds by turningthe interval adjuster barrel (1).

eration

OMC048905N

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

81

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

81HAZARD WARNING SYS-TEM

B370A01A-AAT

CAUTION:!

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH

B380A01MC-AAT

Page 92: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 92/271

The hazard warning system should beused whenever you find it necessary tostop the car in a hazardous location.When you must make such an emer-

gency stop, always pull off the road as faras possible.The hazard warning lights are turned onby pushing in the hazard switch. Thiscauses all turn signal lights to blink. Thehazard warning lights will operate eventhough the key is not in the ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off,push the switch a second time.

OMC025067

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to re-move foreign deposits from the innersurface of the glass as this may causedamage to the defroster elements.

NOTE:The engine must be running for the rearwindow defroster to operate.

!

The rear window defroster is turned on bypushing in the switch. To turn the de-froster off, push the switch a second time.The rear window defroster automaticallyturns itself off after about 20 minutes. Torestart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.

OMC025072

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

82 CIGARETTE LIGHTERDIGITAL CLOCK

B420A01A-AATB400A01A-AAT

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360A04A-AAT

(If Installed)

Page 93: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 93/271

For the cigarette lighter to work, the keymust be in the "ACC" position or the "ON"position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the

way into its socket. When the element hasheated, the lighter will pop out to the"ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressedin. This can damage the heating elementand create a fire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarettelighter, use only a genuine Hyundai re-placement or its approved equivalent.

HHR2098A

There are three control buttons for thedigital clock. Their functions are:

HOUR - Push "H" to advance the hourindicated.MIN - Push "M" to advance the minuteindicated.RESET - Push "R" to reset minutes to":00" to facilitate resetting the clock tothe correct time. When this is done:

Pressing "R" between 10 : 30 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00. Pressing"R" between 11 : 30 and 12 : 29 changesthe readout to 12 : 00.

OMC029098N

To turn on the front fog lights, push theswitch. They will light when the headlightswitch is in the second position and thekey is in the "ON" position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams,the front fog lights will be turned off.

OMC025062

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

83

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

83POWER OUTLET

B500D01MC-GAT

ASHTRAY

B430A01MC-GAT

! CAUTION:o Only use the power outlet when the

Page 94: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 94/271

These supply 12V electric power to oper-ate electric accessories or equipment onlywhen the key is in the "ON" or "ACC"position.

OMC029106

To use the ashtray, open the cover. Toremove the ashtray to empty or clean it,pull it all the way out.

OMC025103

! CAUTION:o Only use the power outlet when theengine is running. Unplug the plugfrom the power outlet when the en-gine is off if the key will be left in the"ACC" or "ON" (not recommended)positions, to prevent discharging thebattery. Using when the engine stops

or leaving the electric applianceplugged in for many hours may causethe battery to discharge.

o Do not use the power outlet to con-nect electric accessories or equip-ment other than those designed tooperate on 12 volts.

o Some electronic devices can cause

electronic interference when pluggedinto the power outlet. These devicesmay cause excessive audio noiseand malfunctions in other electronicsystems or devices used in yourvehicle.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

84 SUNROOF

B460A02Y-AAT

(If Installed)

Sun Shade

B450B01MC-GAT

REAR DRINK HOLDER (If Installed)

DRINK HOLDER

B450A02O-AAT

FRONT DRINK HOLDER

Page 95: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 95/271

!

1JBA3110

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a slidingsunshade which you can manually adjustto let in light with the sunroof closed, or toblock sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driv-ing. This could result in loss of controland an accident that may cause death,serious injury, or property damage.

OMC025034

! WARNING:Use caution when using the drink hold-ers. A spilled beverage that is very hotcan injure your passengers. Spilled liq-

uids can damage interior trim.

The rear drink holder is located in the rearseat armrest for holding cups or cans.The rear drink holder can be used bypulling the rear seat armrest.! WARNING:

o Use caution when using the drink holders. A spilled beverage that isvery hot can injure you or your pas-sengers. Spilled liquids can damageinterior trim and electrical compo-

nents.o Do not place objects other than cupsor cans in the drink holder. Objectscan be thrown out in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the ve-hicle.

OMC025108

The drink holder is located on the mainconsole for holding cups or cans.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

85

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

85

B460B01MC-GAT

Opening the Sunroof System Auto slide open

To use the auto slide feature, press theSLIDE OPEN button on the overhead

B460C01TG-AAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

Page 96: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 96/271

If your vehicle is equipped with this fea-ture, you can slide or tilt your sunroof withthe sunroof control buttons located on theoverhead console.The sunroof can only be opened, closed,or tilted when the ignition switch is in the"ON" position.

OMC025021

!

console for more than 1 second. Thesunroof will slide all the way open. Tostop the sunroof sliding at any point, pressany sunroof control button.

Manual slide open

Press the SLIDE OPEN button on theoverhead console for less than 0.5 sec-ond.

Manual slide close

To close the sunroof, press the TILT UPbutton on the overhead console and holdit until the sunroof is closed.

WARNING:Be careful that someone’s head, handsand body are not trapped by a closingsunroof.

Auto tilt up

To use the auto tilt feature, press the TILT

UP button on the overhead console formore than 1 second. The sunroof will tiltall the way open. To stop the sunrooftilting at any point, press any sunroofcontrol button.

Manual tilt up

Press the TILT UP button on the over-head console for less than 0.5 second.

OMC025021

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

86

B460E02TG-GAT

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is discon-t d di h d h t t! CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely

Manual tilt down

To close the sunroof, press the SLIDEOPEN button on the overhead console

Page 97: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 97/271

! CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may notoperate properly.

nected or discharged, you have to resetyour sunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" posi-tion.

2. Press the TILT UP button for more than1 second to tilt up the sunroof com-pletely when the sunroof is fully closed.Then, release the button.

3. Press and hold the TILT UP buttononce again until the sunroof has re-turned to the original position of TILTUP after it is raised a little higher thanthe maximum TILT UP position. Then,release the button.

4. Press and hold the TILT UP buttonwithin 5 seconds until the sunroof isoperated as follows;

TILT DOWN → SLIDE OPEN → SLIDECLOSE

Then, release the button.

! p ycold temperature or when it is cov-ered with ice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

o Do not press any sunroof controlbutton longer than necessary.

Damage to the motor or system com-ponents could occur.

and hold it until the sunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there israin, be sure to wipe off any water that ison the sunroof before operating it.

! WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's

hands, arms or body are betweenthe sliding glass and the sunroof

sash, as this could result in injury.o Do not place your head or arms outof the sunroof opening at any time.

o While the vehicle is moving, alwayskeep the head, hands and other partsof the body of all occupants awayfrom the roof opening. Otherwise,you could be seriously injured if the

vehicle stops suddenly or if the ve-hicle is involved in an accident.

Page 98: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 98/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

88 GLOVE BOX

B500A01A-AATo "ON"In the "ON" position, the light stays on at

all times.

SUNGLASS HOLDER

B491A03O-AAT

(If Installed)

Page 99: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 99/271

! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case

of an accident or a sudden stop, theglove box door should be kept closedwhen the car is in motion.

B500A01MC

o To open the glove box, pull on theglove box release lever.

CAUTION:Do not leave the switch in this positionfor an extended period of time when thevehicle is not running.

!

!

The sunglass holder is located on thefront overhead console. Push the end ofthe cover to open the sunglass holder.

WARNING:o Do not keep objects except sunglass

inside the sunglass holder. Such ob-jects can be thrown from the holderin the event of a sudden stop or anaccident, possibly injuring the pas-sengers in the vehicle.

o Do not open the sunglass holder whilethe vehicle is moving. The rear viewmirror of the vehicle can be blockedby an open sunglass holder.

B491A03MC

o "OFF"In the "OFF" position, the light stays off atall times even though a door is open.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

89

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

89MULTI BOX

B500B01MC-GAT

CAUTION:If the mirror control is jammed with ice,

!

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIR-ROR

B510A01A-AAT

Manual Type

Page 100: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 100/271

The multi box is opened by pushing theknob downward.

OMC025105

do not attempt to break it free using thecontrol handle or by manipulating theface of the mirror. Use an approvedspray de-icer (not radiator antifreeze) torelease the frozen mechanism or movethe vehicle to a warm place and allow the

ice to melt.

The outside rearview mirrors areequipped with a remote control for yourconvenience. It is operated by the control

lever in the bottom front corner of thewindow.Before driving away, always check thatyour mirrors are positioned so you cansee behind you, both to the left and rightsides, as well as directly behind yourvehicle. When using the mirror, alwaysexercise caution when attempting to judgethe distance of vehicles behind or alongside of you.

OMC025049

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

90

B510C01A-AAT

Folding the Outside Rearview Mir-

rors

To adjust the position of either mir-ror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the rightl f h d bl h

B510B01Y-AAT

Electric Type (If Installed)

Page 101: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 101/271

To fold the outside rearview mirrors, pushthem towards the rear. To unfold the out-side rear view mirrors, push them towardthe front.The outside rearview mirrors can befolded rearward for parking in restrictedareas.

OMC025051

! WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passen-ger side rearview mirror. It is a convexmirror with a curved surface. Any ob-jects seen in this mirror are closer thanthey appear.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continu-

ously for an unnecessary length oftime.

o Scraping ice from the mirror face

could cause permanent damage. Toremove any ice, use a sponge, softcloth or approved de-icer.

!

or left to activate the adjustable mecha-nism for the corresponding door mir-ror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing theappropriate directional switch as illus-trated.

OMC029051

The outside rearview mirrors can be ad- justed to your preferred rear vision, bothdirectly behind the vehicle, and to the

rear of the left and right sides.The remote control outside rearview mir-ror switch controls the adjustments forboth right and left outside mirrors.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

91

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

91PARKING BRAKEDAY/NIGHT INSIDE REAR-VIEW MIRROR

B520A01A-AAT B530A03A-AAT

!WARNING:Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview

Page 102: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 102/271

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/ night inside rearview mirror. The "night"position is selected by flipping the tab atthe bottom of the mirror toward you. In the

"night" position, the glare of headlights ofcars behind you is reduced.

OMC025047

Always engage the parking brake beforeleaving the car. This also turns on theparking brake indicator light when thekey is in the "ON" or "START" position.

Before driving away, be sure that theparking brake is fully released and theindicator light is off.

OMC035017

mirrors while the vehicle is moving. Thiscould result in loss of control, and anaccident causing death, serious injuryor property damage.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

92

!

HIGH-MOUNTED REARSTOP LIGHT

B550A01S-GAT

4 Door

WARNING:Whenever leaving vehicle or parkingl t th ki g b k f

Applying the parking brake

To engage the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and then without pressingthe release button in, pull the parking

Page 103: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 103/271

In addition to the lower-mounted rearstop lights on either side of the car, thehigh mounted rear stop light in the centerof the rear window or inserted in the rearspoiler also lights when the brakes areapplied.

B550A01MC

B550A01MC-1

3 Door

always set the parking brake as far aspossible and fully engage the vehicle'stransaxle into the park position. Ve-hicles not fully engaged in park with theparking brake set are at risk for movinginadvertently and injuring yourself or

others.

CAUTION:Driving with the parking brake appliedwill cause excessive brake pad (or lin-ing) and brake rotor wear.

Releasing the parking brake

To release the parking brake, first applythe foot brake and pull the praking brakelever slightly. Secondly, depress the re-lease button and lower the parking brakelever while holding the button.

!

, p p gbrake lever up as far as possible. Inaddition it is recommended that whenparking the vehicle on a gradient, the shiftlever should be positioned in the appro-priate low gear on manual transaxle ve-hicles or in the P (Park) position on auto-matic transaxle vehicles.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

93

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

93

Before closing the hood, return the sup-port rod to its clip to prevent it from rattling.

Lower the hood until it is about 1 ft. (30cm) above the closed position and let itdrop Make sure that it locks into place

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01MC-GAT

Page 104: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 104/271

3. Pull the support rod from the hood.

B570A01MC

4. Hold the hood open with the supportrod.

B570A02MC

CAUTION:Make sure that the support rod has been

released prior to closing the hood.

!

drop. Make sure that it locks into place.

OMC025020

2. Pull the secondary latch lever up andlift the hood.

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch thehood.

OMC025019

! WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that

the hood is firmly latched before driv-ing away. If it is not latched, the hoodcould fly open while the vehicle isbeing driven, causing a total loss ofvisibility, which might result in anaccident.

o The support rod must be insertedcompletely into the hole provided inthe hood whenever you inspect theengine compartment. This will pre-vent the hood from falling and possi-bly injuring you.

o Do not move the vehicle with thehood in the raised position, as visionis obstructed and the hood could fallor be damaged.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

94 REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LIDRELEASE

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because

ice has formed around it, tap lightly orpush on the lid to break the ice andrelease the lid Do not pry on the lid If

4 DoorB560A02MC-AAT

Page 105: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 105/271

release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. Ifnecessary, spray around the lid with anapproved de-icer fluid (do not use radia-tor anti-freeze) or move the vehicle to awarm place and allow the ice to melt.

B560A02MC-1

B560A02MC

3 DoorOMC025017

The fuel-filler lid must be opened frominside the vehicle by pulling up on thefuel-filler lid opener located on the frontfloor area on the left side of the car.

Page 106: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 106/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

96

!WARNING:- When refueling always shut the

engine off. Sparks produced by!

TRUNK LID/TAIL GATE

B540A01MC-GAT

WARNING:The trunk lid or the tail gate should al-

Trunk Lid (4 Door)

Page 107: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 107/271

engine off. Sparks produced byelectrical components related tothe engine can ignite fuel vaporscausing a fire. Always insure thatthe engine is OFF before and dur-ing refueling. Once refueling is

complete, check to make sure thefuel filler cap and door are se-curely closed, before starting theengine.

- Do not light any fire around a gasstation. DO NOT use matches or alighter and DO NOT SMOKE orleave a lit cigarette in your vehicle

while at a gas station especiallyduring refueling. Automotive fuelis highly flammable and can, whenignited, result in explosion byflames.

- If a fire breaks out during refueling,leave the vicinity of the vehicle,and immediately contact the man-

ager of the gas station or contactthe police and local fire depart-ment. Follow any safety instruc-tions they provide.

The trunk lid or the tail gate should always be kept completely closed whilethe vehicle is in motion. If it is left open orajar, poisonous exhaust gases may en-ter the car resulting in serious illiness ordeath to the occupants. See additional

warnings concerning exhaust gases onpage 2-2.

o The trunk lid is opened by first turningthe key clockwise to release the lock,then raising the door manually.

o To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks. To be sure thetrunk lid is securely fastened, try to pullit up again.

OMC025010

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

97

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

97

B540B02MC-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release

(4 Door)

B540D01MC-GAT

Remote Trunk Lid Release

(4 Door) (If Installed)

Tail Gate (3 Door)

Page 108: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 108/271

OMC025013

Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the dark emergency trunk release leverlocated inside the trunk. It will glow afterthe trunk is closed. When pulled, thislever will release the trunk latch mecha-nism and open the trunk.

! WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is inmotion. If it is left open or ajar, exhaustgases may enter the car and seriousillness may result.

OMC025011

To open the trunk lid without using thekey, pull up the lid release lever.To close, lower the trunk lid, then pressdown on it until it locks. To be sure thetrunk lid is securely fastened, check bytrying to pull it up again.

o To open the tail gate, unlock it byturning the key clockwise, then pull theoutside handle toward you.

o To close, lower the tail gate and shutfirmly to engage the latch. Lock the tailgate by turning the key counterclock-wise.

o If the vehicle is equipped with centraldoor locking, the tail gate can be lockedwithout a key. Push the front portion ofthe central door locking switch afterclosing the tail gate.

o If the tail gate is open when the frontportion of the central door lockingswitch is pushed, the tail gate will belocked when it is fully closed.

OMC025010-1

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

98

! WARNING:o If a person becomes locked in the

trunk, pull the emergency trunk re-l l f h i id l i h

! CAUTION:To prevent damage to the goods or thevehicle, care should be taken when car-

LUGGAGE NET

B540D02O-AAT

(If Installed)

Type A

Page 109: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 109/271

lease lever of the inside panel in thetrunk to open the trunk lid.

o Keep cars locked and keys out of thereach of children. HYUNDAI recom-mends parents teach children aboutthe emergency trunk release leverin their vehicle and how to open thetrunk lid if they are accidentallylocked in the trunk.

rying fragile or bulky objects in the lug-gage compartment.

! WARNING:Avoid eye injury. DO NOT overstretchthe luggage net. ALWAYS keep yourface and body out of its recoil path. DONOT use when the luggage net strapshave visible signs of wear or damage.

When loading the objects in the luggagecompartment, use the four rings locatedin the luggage compartment to attach theluggage net as shown illustration. Thiswill help prevent the objects from sliding.

1JBA3113

B540D01MC

Type B

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

99

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

99SUN VISOR

B580A02MC-AAT

CARGO AREA COVER

B650A01A-GAT

(3 Door)

FLOOR MAT ANCHOR(S)

B571A03Y-AAT

(If Installed)

Page 110: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 110/271

B580A01MC

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visorsto give the driver and front passengereither frontal or sideward shade. To re-duce glare or to shut out direct rays of the

sun, turn the sun visor down.

Nothing should be carried on top of theluggage cover. Loose materials couldresult in injury to vehicle occupants dur-

ing sudden braking.

B650A01MC

When using a floor mat on the front floorcarpet, make sure it attaches to the floormat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps

the floor mat from sliding forward.

OMC040174

! WARNING:o Make sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the floor carpet. If the floormat slips and interferes with the move-

ment of the pedals during driving, itmay cause an accident.o Don't put an additional floor mat on

the top of the anchored floor mat,otherwise the additional mat mayslide forward and interfere with themovement of the pedals.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

100

!WARNING:o Do not place the sun visor in such a

manner that it obscures visibility of

B500B01B-GAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror(If Installed)

Page 111: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 111/271

the roadway, traffic or other objects.o Do not move the sun visor out to

cover the side window if there is anitem attended to it such as a garagedoor remote control, pens, air fresh-

eners or the like. These objects couldcause injury if the curtain airbag isdeployed.

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror willautomatically turn on the mirror light.

OMC025100

Ticket holders and vanity mirrors are pro-vided on the back of the sun visor for thedriver and the front passenger (If Installed).

NOTE:

The Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) label containing useful informa-tion can be found on the topside of sunvisor.

B580A02MC

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

101

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

101

B580C01JM-AAT

Sun Visor Extender (If Installed)

STEERING WHEEL TILTLEVER

B600A01A-AAT

(If Installed)

HORN

B610B01L-GAT

Page 112: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 112/271

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visorextenders that may be used when thevisor is in the side glass position.

B580C01MC

!

To Adjust the Steering Wheel:1. Push the lever downward to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to

the desired position.3. After adjustment, securely tighten the

lever by pulling it upward.

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steeringwheel while driving as this may result inloss of control of the vehicle which maycause serious injury or death.

OMC025045 Press the pad on the steering wheel tosound the horn.

OMC025046

Page 113: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 113/271

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

103

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

103

!WARNING:o Pay particular attention to the driv-

ing conditions whenever using thecruise control system

E090100AMC

To set cruise control speed:

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

E090000AMC

(If Installed)

The cruise control system allows you toprogram the vehicle to maintain a con-stant speed without resting your foot onh l d l

Page 114: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 114/271

cruise control system.o Be careful when driving downhill

using the cruise control system,which may increase the vehiclespeed.

! CAUTION:During cruise-speed driving of a manualtransaxle vehicle, do not shift into neu-tral without depressing the clutch pedal,since the engine will be overrevved. Ifthis happens, depress the clutch pedalor release the cruise control ON/OFFswitch.

NOTE:During normal cruise control operation,when the -/SET switch is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize after ap-proximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.

1. Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button onthe steering wheel to turn the systemon. The CRUISE indicator light in the

instrument cluster will illuminate.2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which

must be more than 25 mph (40 km/h).

OMC039300

the accelerator pedal.This system is designed to function aboveapproximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

! WARNING:o If the cruise control is left on,

(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-ment cluster illuminated) the cruisecontrol can be switched on acciden-tally. Keep the cruise control sys-tem off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)when the cruise control is not in use,to avoid inadvertently setting aspeed.

o Use the cruise control system onlywhen traveling on open highways ingood weather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, drivingin heavy or varying traffic, or onslippery (rainy, icy or snow-covered)or winding roads or over 6% up-hillor down-hill roads.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

104

E090200AMC

To increase cruise control set speed:NOTE:On steeper hills, with a Manual Transaxle,the cruise control may be unable to main-tain the set speed. The driver shoulddownshift as necessary. Press the"RES/+" button to resume the cruise

Page 115: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 115/271

Follow either of these procedures:o Push the RES/+ switch and hold it.

Your vehicle will accelerate. Release

the switch at the speed you want.o Push the RES/+ switch and release it

immediately. The cruising speed willincrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) eachtime the RES/+ switch is operated inthis manner.

OMC039302

control at the set speed in the new gear.After cresting the hill, upshift, and pressthe "RES/+" again. If the speed drops ~9 mph below the set speed, the cruisecontrol will cancel. If it cancels, shift tothe appropriate gear, and press the"RES/+" to resume the cruse control.OMC039301

3. Push the -/SET switch, and release it atthe desired speed. The SET indicatorlight in the instrument cluster will illu-minate. Release the accelerator at thesame time. The desired speed will

automatically be maintained.On a steep grade, the vehicle may slowdown or speed up slightly while goingdownhill.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

105

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

105

E090500AMC

To cancel cruise control, do one ofthe following:

E090400AUN

To temporarily accelerate with thecruise control on:

If you want to speed up temporarily whenthe cruise control is on, depress the ac-

l t d l I d d ill t

E090300AMC

To decrease the cruising speed:

Page 116: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 116/271

o Press the brake pedal.o Press the clutch pedal with a manual

transaxle.o Shift into N (Neutral) with an automatic

transaxle.o Press the CANCEL switch located on

the steering wheel.o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than

the memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less

than approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

OMC039303

celerator pedal. Increased speed will notinterfere with cruise control operation orchange the set speed.To return to the set speed, take your footoff the accelerator.

Follow either of these procedures:o Push the -/SET switch and hold it. Your

vehicle will gradually slow down. Re-

lease the switch at the speed you wantto maintain.o Push the -/SET switch and release it

immediately. The cruising speed willdecrease by 1 mph (1.6 km/h) eachtime the -/SET switch is operated inthis manner.

OMC039301

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

106

E090600AMC

To resume cruising speed at morethan approximately 25 mph (40 km/h):

Each of these actions will cancel cruisecontrol operation (the SET indicator lightin the instrument cluster will go off), but itwill not turn the system off. If you wish toresume cruise control operation, pushthe RES/+ switch located on your steer-

E090700AUN

To turn cruise control off, do one ofthe following:

Page 117: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 117/271

If any method other than the CRUISE ON-OFF switch was used to cancel cruisingspeed and the system is still activated,the most recent set speed will automati-cally resume when the RES/+ switch ispushed. It will not resume, however, if thevehicle speed has dropped below ap-proximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

OMC039302

o Push the CRUISE ON-OFF button (theCRUISE indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster will go off).o Turn the ignition off.Both of these actions cancel cruise con-trol operation. If you want to resume cruisecontrol operation, repeat the steps pro-vided in “To set cruise control speed” onthe previous page.

ying wheel. You will return to your previ-ously preset speed.

OMC039300

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

107

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

107AUX, USB AND iPod ® PORT

D281400AFD

(If Installed)

Page 118: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 118/271

If your vehicle has an aux and/orUSB(universal serial bus) port or iPodport, you can use an aux port to connect

audio devices, a USB port to plug in aUSB, and an iPod port to plug in an iPod.When using an iPod through the vehicle'sAudio System, a Hyundai adapter cableis required in order to receive all func-tions, which can be purchased at yourlocal Hyundai dealership.

NOTE:When using a portable audio device con-nected to the power outlet, noise mayoccur during playback. If this happens,use the power source of the portableaudio device.

❈ iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

OMC029033C

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

108 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01TB-GAT

(If Installed)B710B01MC-AAT

Center Ventilator/Side Ventilator

Page 119: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 119/271

1. Side Defroster Nozzle

2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator B710A01MC

B710B01MC

The center ventilators are located in themiddle of the dashboard. The side venti-lators are located on each side of dash-

board. To change the direction of the airflow, move the knob in the center of thevent up-and-down and side-to-side.The vents are opened when the ventknob is moved to " " position. Thevents are closed when the vent knob ismoved to " ". Keep these vents clear ofany obstructions.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

109

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

109

B670B01A-AAT

Fan Speed Control(Blower Control)

B670C03A-AAT

Air Intake Control

HEATING AND VENTILA-TION

B670A02A-GAT

(If Installed)

Page 120: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 120/271

1. Temperature control2. Air conditioning switch (If Installed)3. Air intake control switch

4. Air flow control5. Fan speed control

This is used to turn the blower fan on oroff and to select the fan speed.This blower fan speed, and therefore thevolume of air delivered from the system,may be controlled manually by setting theblower control between the "1" and "4"positions.

B670A01MC-D

OMC025083

B670C02MC

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculating inside air.

FreshRecirculation

With the " " mode selected, air entersthe vehicle from outside and is heated orcooled according to the other functionsselected.With the " " mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment isdrawn through the heating system andheated or cooled according to the otherfunctions selected.

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

110

NOTE:It should be noted that prolonged opera-tion of the intake air system in " "mode will give rise to misting of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecomestale Inadditionprolongeduse

B670D03MC-AAT

Air Flow Control

Page 121: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 121/271

become stale. In addition prolonged useof the air conditioning with the " "mode selected may result in the air withinthe passenger compartment becomingexcessively dry.

This is used to direct the flow of air. Aircan be directed to the floor, instrumentpanel outlets, or windshield. Five sym-bols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost airposition.

B670D01MC-D Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause airto be discharged through the face level

vents.

B670D02MC

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

111

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

111

Page 122: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 122/271

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face ventsand the floor vents.

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents,windshield defroster nozzle, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, the floor vents, sidedefroster nozzle and side ventilator.In vehicle equipped with A/C, the A/C willautomatically be turned on and "Fresh"mode will be activated.

B670D03MC B670D04MC B670D05MC

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

112

NOTE:In vehicle equipped with A/C, when "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" modes are se-lected, the A/C will automatically beturned on and "Fresh" mode will be ac-tivated to help dry the air.The A/C will not turn off and "Recircula-

B670E02A-AAT

Temperature Control

Page 123: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 123/271

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshielddefroster nozzle, side defroster nozzle,

side ventilator.In vehicle equipped with A/C, the A/C willautomatically be turned on and "Fresh'mode will be activated.

B670D06MC

The A/C will not turn off and Recircula-tion" mode will not be selected until theair flow control is set to the another modeother than the "Floor-Defrost" and the"Defrost" mode.

This control is used to adjust the degreeof heating or cooling desired.

Cool WarmB670E01MC

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

113

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

113BI-LEVEL HEATING

B700A02A-AAT

VENTILATION

B710A01A-AAT

HEATING CONTROLS

B690A02A-AAT

Page 124: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 124/271

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-levelheating controls. This makes it possibleto have cooler air from the dashboardvents and warmer air from the floor out-lets at the same time. To use this feature:

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air( ) position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level( ) position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

o Set the temperature control between"Cool" and "Warm".

B700B01MC-D

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to "Fresh"mode ( ).

o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the air flow control to the ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to thedesired speed.

o Set the temperature control between"Cool" and "Warm".

B710A01MC-D

For normal heating operation, set the airintake control to the fresh air ( ) positionand the air flow control to the floor ( )position.For faster heating, the air intake controlshould be set in the recirculate ( )position.If the windows fog up, set the air flowcontrol to the defrost ( ) position (TheA/C will automatically be turned on and"Fresh" mode will be activated.).For maximum heat, move the tempera-

ture control to "Warm".

B690A01MC-D

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

114 DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A01MC-AAT NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuouslyon the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrostlevel ( ), it may cause fog to form onthe exterior windshield. If this occurs,set the air flow control to the face levelposition ( ) and fan speed control to the

Page 125: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 125/271

Use the heating/ventilation system todefrost or defog the windshield:

To remove interior fog on the wind-

shield:o Set the air flow control to the defrost

( ) position (The A/C will automati-cally be turned on and "Fresh" modewill be activated.).

o Set the temperature control to the de-sired position.

o Set the fan speed control between "1"and "4" position.

B720A01MC-D

low position.

To remove the frost or exterior fogon the windshield:

o Set the air flow control to the defrost( ) position (The A/C will automati-cally be turned on and "Fresh" modewill be activated.).

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position

"3" or "4".

B720A02MC-D

Page 126: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 126/271

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

116

B740D01A-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when youfirst get in, open the windows for a fewminutes to expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air condition-ing system, keep all windows closed to

B740C01MC-AAT

De-Humidified Heating

Page 127: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 127/271

ing system, keep all windows closed tokeep hot air out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traf-fic, shift to a lower gear.

This increases engine speed, which inturn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air condi-tioning off to avoid the possibility of theengine overheating.

o During winter months or in periodswhen the air conditioning is not used

regularly, run the air conditioning onceevery month for a few minutes.This will help circulate the lubricantsand keep your system in peak operat-ing condition.

For dehumidified heating:

o Turn on the fan control switch.o Push the air conditioning switch. The

air conditioning indicator light shouldcome on at the same time.

o Set the air intake control switch to thefresh air ( ) position.

o Adjust the fan control to the desiredspeed.

o For more rapid action, set the fan at

one of the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to pro-vide the desired amount of warmth.

B740C01MC-D

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

117

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

117

B720A01MC-AAT

DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

Page 128: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 128/271

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield;

o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position (TheA/C will automatically be turned on and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.).

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position (The

A/C will automatically be turned on and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.).

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to formon the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed controlto the low position.

OMC029102 OMC029103

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

118

!CAUTION:

o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles(15,000 km) or once a year. If the caris being driven in severe conditionssuch as dusty, rough roads, more

CLIMATE CONTROL AIRFILTER

Outside air

B760A07A-AAT

(For evaporator and blow unit)

Page 129: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 129/271

frequent climate control air filter in-spections and changes are required.

o When the air flow rate is decreased,

the system should be checked at anauthorized dealer.

B760A01MC

Inside ofa vehicle

Evaporator core FilterBlower

Inside air

The climate control air filter is located infront of the evaporator unit behind theglove box.

It operates to decrease the amount ofpollutants entering the car.To replace the climate control air filter,refer to the page 6-16.

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

119

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

119STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works FM radio station

FM reception

AM reception

Page 130: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 130/271

¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢ ¢¢ ¢ ¢

FM broadcasts are transmitted at highfrequencies and do not bend to follow theearth's surface. Because of this, FM broad-casts generally begin to fade at shortdistances from the station. Also, FM sig-

nals are easily affected by buildings,mountains, or other obstructions. Thesecan result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a prob-lem exists with your radio. The followingconditions are normal and do not indicateradio trouble:

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This isbecause AM radio waves are transmittedat low frequencies. These long, low fre-quency radio waves can follow the curva-

ture of the earth rather than travellingstraight out into the atmosphere. In addi-tion, they curve around obstructions sothat they can provide better signal cover-age.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcastfrom transmitter towers located aroundyour city. They are intercepted by theradio antenna on your car. This signal isthen received by the radio and sent toyour car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reachedyour vehicle, the precise engineering ofyour audio system ensures the best pos-sible quality reproduction. However, insome cases the signal coming to your

vehicle may not be strong and clear.This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, close-ness of other strong radio stations or thepresence of buildings, bridges or otherlarge obstructions in the area.

JBM002 JBM003

JBM001

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

120

¢ ¢ ¢

Satellite radio receptionYou may experience problems in receiv-ing XMTM satellite radio signals in thefollowing situations.

Page 131: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 131/271

o Station Swapping - As an FM signalweakens, another more powerful sig-nal near the same frequency may be-gin to play. This is because your radiois designed to lock onto the clearest

signal. If this occurs, select anotherstation with a stronger signal.o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-

nals being received from several di-rections can cause distortion or flutter-ing. This can be caused by a direct andreflected signal from the same station,or by signals from two stations with

close frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition haspassed.

o Fading - As your car moves away fromthe radio station, the signal willweaken and sound will begin to fade.When this occurs, we suggest that youselect another stronger station.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals orlarge obstructions between the trans-mitter and your radio can disturb thesignal causing static or fluttering noisesto occur. Reducing the treble levelmay lessen this effect until the distur-bance clears.

JBM004

• If you are driving in a tunnel or acovered parking area.

• If you are driving beneath the top levelof a multi-level freeway.

• If you drive under a bridge.• If you are driving next to a tall

vechicle(such as a truck or a bus) thatblock the signal.

• If you are driving in a valley where thesurrounding hills or peaks block thesignal from the satellite.

• If you are driving on a mountain roadwhere is blocked by mountains.

JBM005

SATELITE1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

121

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

121

B750B05Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-wayradio

When a cellular phone is used inside thevehicle, noise may be produced from theaudio equipment. This does not meanthat something is wrong with the audio

Page 132: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 132/271

!

equipment. In such a case, use the cellu-lar phone at a place as far as possiblefrom the audio equipment.

WARNING:Hyundai recommends that you neveruse a cell phone while driving. This couldresult in loss of control, and an accidentthat may cause death, serious injury, orproperty damage. You must stop at asafe place to use a cellular phone.

NOTE:Some states and cities have regulationsprohibiting the use of cell phones whiledriving. You should be aware of the spe-

cific requirements in your area.

• If you are driving in an area with talltrees that block the signal(10m ormore), for example on an road thatgoes through a dense forset.

• The signal can become weak in some

areas that are not covered by the re-peater station network.

Please note that these may be otherunforeseen circumstances when there areproblems with the reception of XM TM sat-ellite radio signal.

SATELITE2

1 FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

122 CARE OF DISCS

Storage

When not in use, place your discs in their

individual cases and store them in a coolplace away from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.

B850A02F-AAT

Proper Handling

ANTENNA

B870D02MC-AAT

MICRO ANTENNA

Page 133: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 133/271

Keep Your Discs Clean

Handle your disc as shown. Do not dropthe disc. Hold the disc so you will notleave fingerprints on the surface. If the

surface is scratched, it may cause thepickup to skip signal tracks. Do not affixtape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped

or cracked discs. These could severelydamage the playback mechanism.

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface ofa disc could cause the pickup to skipsignal tracks. Wipe the surface clean with

a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen aclean soft cloth in a solution of mild neu-tral detergent to wipe it clean.

B850A01L

B850A02L

Your car uses the micro antenna to re-ceive AM, FM and Satellite Radio broad-cast signals. This antenna is removable.

OMC025111-1

CAUTION:o Before entering an automatic car

wash, remove by turning the antennacounterclockwise to prevent dam-age to the micro antenna. To installthe antenna, turn the antenna clock-wise.

o Be sure to remove the micro an-tenna before entering a garage witha low height or installing a car cover.

!

1

123

123

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1AUDIO SYSTEM

1. AM Selection Button2. FM Selection Button

PA710A01MC-AAT

RADIO, SET UP, VOLUME CONTROL (PA710) (If Installed)

Page 134: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 134/271

2. FM Selection Button3. Automatic Channel Selection Button4. Power ON/OFF & Volume Control

Button5. SCAN Button6. MUTE Button7. SETUP Button8. TUNE/ENTER Button9. PRESET Button

A-200MCUA

1

125

125

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

PA710C01MC-AAT

CD (PA710) (If Installed)

1. CD Loading Slot2. CD Indicator

Page 135: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 135/271

2. CD Indicator3. CD Eject Button4. CD Selection Button5. AUX Selection Button6. Automatic Track Selection Button7. Information Display Button8. TUNE/ENTER Button9. RANDOM Play Button10. REPEAT Button11. SCAN Play Button12. FOLDER Button

A-200MCUA

1

127

127

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

11. SCAN Play ButtonPlays first 10 seconds of each song in theDISC. To cancel the mode, press the keyonce again.

12. FOLDER ButtonFolder up/down operation.o Folder is moved up or down from cur

NOTE:o To assure Proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle interior tem-perature within a nomal range byusing the vehicle’s air conditioningor heating system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damageto the unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins intothe player slot as damage to the unit

Page 136: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 136/271

o Folder is moved up or down from cur-rently playing and folder name be-comes displayed.

o Press enter key to play theselectedfolder.o If the enter key is not pressed with in 5

seconds, then the previous folder namewill be displayed again.

ity.o All stored bookmarks are all erased

when the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehocle is lost. if thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have tobe reset.

o This equipment is designed to beused only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to disassemble oradjust any parts.

o when driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and CD) to wateror excessive moisture.

may occur.o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.

o Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damage tothe system mechanisms could oc-cur.

o Off-road or rough sunface drivingmay cause the compact disc to skip.Do not use the compact disc whendriving in such conditions as dam-age to the compact disc face couldoccur.

o Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unit by theself-loading mechanism. Damage tothe audio unit and compact disc couldoccur.

1

129

129

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

PA710SB01MC-AAT

1. AUX/USB Selection ButtonIf the auxiliary device is connected, it

turns to AUX or USB mode to play thesound from the auxiliary player. If there isno auxiliary device, then it displays themessage "No Media" for 3 seconds andreturns to the previous mode.

3. RANDOM Playback ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel the

7. FOLDER Moving Buttono Press [FOLDER ] button to move to

child folder of the current folder anddisplay the first song in the folder.Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed. It will play the firstsong in the folder.

o Press [FOLDER ] button to move to

Page 137: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 137/271

2. TRACK Moving Buttono Press the [TRACK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to play from the begin-ning of the song currently played.Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-ond and press it again within 1 sec-onds to move to and play the previoustrack.Press the button for 0.8 second orlonger to play the song in reversedirection in fast speed.

o Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 second to move to the nexttrack. Press the button for 0.8 secondor longer to play the song in forwarddirection in fast speed.

mode.

4. REPEAT Selection ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.

5. SCAN Selection ButtonScans each song in the USB device for10 seconds each.Press the button once again to cancelscanning.

6. INFO ButtonDisplays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of FILE NAME➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟

FILE NAME ➟ … (Displays no informa-tion if the file has no song information.)

parent folder display the first song inthe folder.Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed.

8. SEARCH Knob & ENTER ButtonTurn this button clockwise to display thesongs ahead of the currently played song.Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-play the songs before the currently played

song.o Press the button to skip to and play theselected song.

o Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode selectedis shown on the display. After selectingeach mode, rotate the Audio control

knob clockwise or counterclockwise.

1

131

131

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

PA710SC01MC-AAT

RUNNING iPod ® (PA710) (If Installed)

Page 138: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 138/271

1. iPod Selection Button2. TRACK Moving Button3. RANDOM Playback Button4. REPEAT Selection Button5. INFO Button6. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button7. CATEGORY Selection Button

iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

A-200MCUA

1

133

133

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

! CAUTION:o You need the power cable exclusivefor an iPod in order to operate an

iPod with the buttons on the audiosystem. The PC cable provided byApple may cause a malfunction anddo not use it for vehicle use

NOTE:o Some iPod models might not support

the communication protocol and thefiles will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,5G)

o The order of search or playback ofsongs in the iPod can be differentf h d h d i h di

Page 139: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 139/271

do not use it for vehicle use.o When connecting the device with an

iPod cable, push in the jack fully not

to interfere with communication.o When adjusting the sound effects of

an iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices willoverlap and might reduce or distortthe quality of the sound.

o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of an iPod when adjustingthe audio system’s volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of an iPod.

o When the iPod cable is connected,the system can be switched to theAUX mode even without the iPoddevice and can cause noise. Discon-nect the iPod cable when you are notusing the iPod device.

o When the iPod is not used for theaudio system, the iPod cable has tobe separate from iPod devices. Origi-nal display of iPod may not be dis-played.

from the order searched in the audiosystem.

o If the iPod crashes due to its ownmalfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:Refer to iPod manual)

o An iPod may not operate normally onlow battery.

1

135

135

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

1. AM Selection ButtonPressing the [AM] button selects the AMband. AM Mode is displayed on the LCD.

2. FM Selection ButtonTurns to FM mode and toggles FM1 andFM2 when the button is pressed eachtime.

5. Power ON/OFF & Volume ControlButton

Turns on/off the set when the IGNITIONSWITCH is on ACC or ON. If the button isturned to the right, it increases the volumeand left, decreases the volume.

6. SCAN Button

8. SETUP ButtonPress this button to turn to the SCROLL,XM option, RETURN and P.BASS adjust-ment mode.If no action is taken for 5 seconds afterpressing the button, it will return to theplay mode.(After entering SETUP mode,move between items using the left, right

d PUSH f ti f th TUNE b tt )

Page 140: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 140/271

3. XM Selection ButtonTurns to FM mode, and toggles in theorder of XM1 ➟ XM2➟ XM3➟ ···➟ XM1···when the button is pressed time.

4. Automatic Channel SelectionButton

o When the [SEEK ] button is pressed,

it reduces the band frequency by200khz to automatically select chan-nel. Stops at the previous frequency ifno channel is found.

o When the [SEEK ] button is pressed,it increases the band frequency by50khz to automatically select channel.Stops at the previous frequency if no

channel is found.

If this button is pressed, the frequencieswill become increased and receive the

corresponding broadcasts.This function will play the frequencies for10 seconds each and find other broad-casts as the frequency increases.Press the button again when desiring tocontinue listening to the currently playingbroadcast.

7. MUTE ButtonPress to temporarily cut off the Sound.

and PUSH functions of the TUNE button.)The setup Items changes from SCROLL<->XM<->RETURN<->P.BASS.

9.Infomation Display Button

Informatiom is Display Function opetion(Information is displayed each time (the)ey is pressed)Pressing the Title ➟ Artist ➟ Album Cat-

egory ➟ Channel ➟ Title-KEY for 3 sec-onds will display the corresponding textthen become restored.

Text Scroll operationAfter pressing (the) Key, if the text to bedisplayed is longer than the LCD text line,then rotating the TUNE Knob will operatethe page up function displaying 8 charac-ters for 3 seconds each-displayes themaximum lines of text supported by XM.

1

137

137

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

PA710SC01MC-AAT

CD (PA710S) (If Installed)

1. CD Loading Slot

Page 141: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 141/271

1. CD Loading Slot2. CD Indicator3. CD Eject Button

4. CD/AUX Selection Button5. Automatic Track Selection Button6. Information Display Button7. TUNE/ENTER Button8. RANDOM Play Button9. REPEAT Button10. SCAN Play Button11. FOLDER Button

A-200MCUA

1

139

139

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

10. SCAN Play ButtonScans each song in the USB device for10 seconds each. To cancel the mode,press the button once again.

11. FOLDER ButtonFolder up/down operation.o Folder is moved up or down from

NOTE:o To assure Proper operation of the

unit, keep the vehicle tnterior tem-

perature within a nomal range byusing the vehicle’s air conditioningor heating system.

o When replacing the fuse, replace itwith a fuse having the correct capac-ity.

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damageto the unit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins intothe player slot as damage to the unitmay occur

Page 142: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 142/271

currently playing and folder name be-comes displayed.

o Press en te r key to play theselectedfolder.o If the enter key is not pressed with in

5 seconds, then the previous foldername will be displayed again.

ity.o All stored bookmarks are all erased

when the car battery is disconnectedor power to the vehocle is lost. if thisoccurs, the bookmarks will have tobe reset.

o This equipment is designed to beused only in a 12 volt DC batterysystem with negative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts.Do not attempt to dosassemble oradjust any parts.

o when driving your vehicle, be sureto keep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (in-cluding the speakers and CD) to wateror excessive moisture.

may occur.o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mecha-nism may be damaged if you spillthem.

o Do not strike or allow anything toimpact the audio system, damage tothe system mechanisms could oc-cur.

o Off-road or rough sunface drivingmay cause the compact disc to skip.Do not use the compact disc whendriving in such conditions as dam-age to the compact disc face couldoccur.

o Do not attempt to grab or pull thecompact disc out while the disc isbeing pulled into the audio unit by theself-loading mechanism. Damage tothe audio unit and compact disc couldoccur.

1

141

141

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

1. CD/AUX Selection ButtonIf USB is connected, it switches to theUSB mode fron the other mode to play thesong file stored in the USB. if no CD andauxiliary device is not connected, it dis-plays “NO Media” for 3 seconds and re-turns to the previous mode.

2 TRACK Moving Button

3. RANDOM Playback ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto start or stop the random playback of thesongs in the current folder.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto randomly play the entire songs in theUSB device.Press the button again to cancel themode.

7. FOLDER Moving Buttono Press [FOLDER ] button to move to

child folder of the current folder anddisplay the first song in the folder.Press TUNE/ ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed. It will play the firstsong in the folder.

o Press [FOLDER ] button to move toparent folder display the first song in

Page 143: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 143/271

2. TRACK Moving Buttono Press the [TRACK ] button for less

than 0.8 second to play from the begin-ning of the song currently played.Press the button for less than 0.8 sec-ond and press it again within 1 sec-onds to move to and play the previoustrack.Press the button for 0.8 second orlonger to play the song in reverse

direction in fast speed.o Press the [TRACK ] button for lessthan 0.8 second to move to the nexttrack. Press the button for 0.8 secondor longer to play the song in forwarddirection in fast speed.

mode.

4. REPEAT ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the song currently played.Press the button for more than 0.8 secondto repeat the entire songs in the USBdevice.

5. SCAN Selection ButtonPress the button for less than 0.8 secondto repeat the button for more than 0.8second to repeat the entire songs in theUSB device.

6. INFO ButtonDisplays the information of the file cur-

rently played in the order of FILE NAME➟ TITLE ➟ ARTIST ➟ ALBUM ➟ FOLDER➟ TOTAL FILE ➟ NORMAL DISPLAY ➟

FILE NAME ➟ … (Displays no informa-tion if the file has no song information.)

parent folder display the first song inthe folder.Press TUNE/ENTER knob to move tothe folder displayed.

8. SEARCH Knob & ENTER ButtonTurn this button clockwise to display thesongs ahead of the currently played song.Turn the button counterclockwise to dis-play the songs before the currently played

song.o Press the button to skip to and play theselected song.

o Pressing the button changes the BASS,MIDDLE, TREBLE, FADER and BAL-ANCE TUNE mode. The mode se-lected is shown on the display. Afterselecting each mode, rotate the Audio

control knob clockwise or counterclock-wise.

1

143

143

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

PA710SC01MC-AAT

RUNNING iPod ® (PA710S) (If Installed)

Page 144: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 144/271

1. iPod Selection Button2. TRACK Moving Button3. RANDOM Playback Button4. REPEAT Selection Button5. INFO Button6. SEARCH Knob & ENTER Button7. CATEGORY Selection Button

iPod ® is a trademark of Apple Inc.

A-200MCUA

1

145

145

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 1

NOTE:o Some iPod models might not support

the communication protocol and the

files will not be played. (iPod modelssupported: Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano,5G)

o The order of search or playback ofsongs in the iPod can be differentfrom the order searched in the audio

! CAUTION:o You need the power cable exclusivefor an iPod in order to operate an

iPod with the buttons on the audiosystem. The PC cable provided byApple may cause a malfunction anddo not use it for vehicle use.

Page 145: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 145/271

system.o If the iPod crashes due to its own

malfunction, reset the iPod. (Reset:Refer to iPod manual)

o An iPod may not operate normally onlow battery.

o When connecting the device with aniPod cable, push in the jack fully not

to interfere with communication.o When adjusting the sound effects ofan iPod and the audio system, thesound effects of both devices willoverlap and might reduce or distortthe quality of the sound.

o Deactivate (turn off) the equalizerfunction of an iPod when adjustingthe audio system’s volume, and turnoff the equalizer of the audio systemwhen using the equalizer of an iPod.

o When the iPod cable is connected,the system can be switched to theAUX mode even without the iPoddevice and can cause noise. Discon-nect the iPod cable when you are notusing the iPod device.

o When the iPod is not used for theaudio system, the iPod cable has tobe separate from iPod devices. Origi-nal display of iPod may not be dis-played.

Page 146: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 146/271

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

! WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03A-AATEngine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open thewindows immediately.o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death byasphyxiation.

Page 147: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 147/271

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you heara change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaustsystem checked as soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in yourgarage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open areawith the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.If you must drive with the trunk lid/ tail gate open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshieldare kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

Page 148: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 148/271

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

4

C040A02A-AAT

KEY POSITIONS

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, theignition is on and all accessories may beturned on. If the engine is not running, thekey should not be left in the "ON" position.

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01A-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with amanual transaxle, place the shift leverin neutral and depress the clutch pedalfully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatictransaxle, place the shift lever in "P"(park).

h i i h i i i

Page 149: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 149/271

WARNING:The engine should not be turned off orthe key removed from the ignition key

cylinder while the vehicle is in motion.The steering wheel is locked by remov-ing the key.

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. Itwill crank until you release the key.

!

C040A01E-1

START y pThis will discharge the battery and may

also damage the ignition system.o "ACC"

With the key in the "ACC" position, someelectrical accessories (radio, etc.) may beoperated.

o "LOCK"

The key can be removed or inserted inthis position. To protect against theft, thesteering wheel locks by removing thekey.

NOTE:If difficulty is experienced turning theignition switch to the ACC position, turnthe key while turning the steering wheelright and left to release the tension.

o To start the engine, insert the ignitionkey and turn it to the "START" position.Release it as soon as the engine starts.Do not hold the key in the "START"position for more than 15 seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if

the clutch pedal is not depressedfully (Manual Transaxle) or the shiftlever is not in "P" or "N" Position(Automatic Transaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turnedfrom "ACC" position to "LOCK" po-sition unless the shift lever is in the"P" (Park) position or the negativebattery terminal is disconnectedfrom the battery. (For AutomaticTransaxle)

5

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

C070C01A-AAT

To Remove the Ignition Key

LOCK

ACC

ON

STARTING

C050A01A-AAT

LOCK ON

C050B02A-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and

place the gearshift lever (manualtransaxle) in neutral or the selectorlever (automatic transaxle) in "P" (park)

iti

Page 150: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 150/271

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC"position.

2. Simultaneously push and turn the igni-tion key counterclockwise from the"ACC" position to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

C070C01E-1

START

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed orpoorly ventilated area any longer thanis needed to move your car in or out ofthe area. The carbon monoxide gasemitted is odorless and can cause se-rious injury or death.

C050A01E-1

!

START position.3. After turning the ignition key to the

"ON" position, make certain all warn-ing lights and gauges are functioningproperly before starting the engine.

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully de-pressed when starting a manualtransaxle vehicle. Your manualtransaxle equipped vehicle will notstart unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed. On a manual transaxleequipped vehicle that can be startedwithout depressing the clutch,there is the potential to cause damageto the vehicle or injury to someoneinside or outside the vehicle as a resultof the forward or backward movementof the vehicle that will occur if the clutchis not depressed when the vehicle isstarted.

!

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

6

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever

in neutral for at least 3 seconds after

your car is completely stopped. Thenmove the lever into the reverse po-sition.

o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricanthas warmed up. This is normal andnot harmful to the transaxle.

OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE

C070A01MC-GAT4. Turn the ignition key to the "Start" po-sition and release it when the enginestarts.

After the engine has started, allow theengine to run for 10 to 20 secondsprior to placing the vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated formore than 15 seconds at a time. Wait15-30 seconds between starting at-tempts to protect the starter from over-

Page 151: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 151/271

!

o If you've come to a complete stop

and it's hard to shift into 1st

orR(Reverse), put the shift lever inN(Neutral) position and release theclutch. Press the clutch pedal back down, and then shift into 1 st orR(Reverse) gear position.

o Do not use the shift lever as ahandrest during driving, as this can

result in premature wear of thetransaxle shift forks.

Your Hyundai's manual transaxle hasfive forward gears and one reverse gear.This shift pattern is also imprinted on theshift knob. The transaxle is fully synchro-nized in all forward gears so shifting to

either a higher or a lower gear is easilyaccomplished.When shifting into reverse gear, pull themis-shift prevention tab and shift into re-verse gear position.

OMC035013

tempts to protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING:Always fully depress the brake pedalbefore and while shifting out of the "P"Park position into another position toavoid inadvertent motion of the vehiclewhich could injure persons in or aroundthe car.

7

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

! CAUTION:

o Do not downshift more than 2 gearsor downshift the gear when the en-gine is running at high speed (5,000RPM or higher). Such downshiftingmay damage the engine.

o When downshifting from fifth gear tofourth gear, caution should be taken

C070E03A-AAT

RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTSC070B01A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the wayto the floor before shifting, then releasedslowly. Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving. This can cause un-necessary wear.Do not partially engage the clutch to holdthe car on an incline. This causes unnec-essary wear Use the parking brake to

Shift

from-to

Recommended

mph(km/h)

15 (20)

25 (40)

35 (55)

1-2

2-3

3-4

Page 152: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 152/271

g ,not to inadvertently press the gear

shift lever sideways in such a man-ner that second gear is engaged.Such a drastic downshift may causethe engine speed to increase to thepoint that the tachometer will enterthe red zone. Such over revving ofthe engine may possibly cause en-gine damage.

The shift points as shown above arerecommended for optimum fuel economyand performance.

essary wear. Use the parking brake tohold the car on an incline. Do not operatethe clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

( )

45 (75)4-5

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

8

!o Exercise extreme caution when driv-

ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-cially careful when braking, accelerat-

ing or shifting gears. On a slipperysurface, an abrupt change in vehiclespeed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go outof control.

WARNING:

o Always buckle-up! In a collision, anunbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injured orkilled than a properly belted occu-pant.

o Avoid high speeds when corneringor turning.

C070D03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This is extremelyhazardous. Always leave the car ingear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. In-stead, when you are driving down along hill slow down and shift to a lower

Page 153: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 153/271

o Do not make quick steering wheel

movements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.o The risk of rollover is greatly in-

creased if you lose control of yourvehicle at highway speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenter

the roadway.o In the event your vehicle leaves theroadway, do not steer sharply. In-stead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

long hill, slow down and shift to a lowergear. When you do this, engine brak-ing will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. This will help avoid over-revvingthe engine, which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter crosswinds. This gives you much bettercontrol of your car.

o Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into reverse.The transaxle can be damaged if youdo not. To shift into reverse, depressthe clutch, move the shift lever to neu-tral, wait three seconds, then shift tothe reverse position.

9

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

C090A01A-AAT NOTE:Depress the brake pedal and pushthe button when shifting

Push the button when shiftingThe selector lever can be shiftedfreely.

For optimum fuel economy, accelerategradually. The transaxle will automati-

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position is asfollows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place whenparking or while starting the engine.Whenever parking the car, apply the park-ing brake and shift the selector lever tothe "P" (Park) position

Page 154: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 154/271

The highly efficient Hyundai automatictransaxle has four forward speeds andone reverse speed. It has a conventionalshift pattern as shown in the illustration.

OMC035014

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" positionwhile the car is moving.

!

cally shift to the second, third and over-

drive gears.

the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the"P" (Park) position unless the vehicle isfully stopped. Failure to observe thiscaution will cause severe damage tothe transaxle.

!

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

10

C090H01A-AAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, de-

press the brake pedal when shiftingfrom "Neutral" position or "Park"position to a forward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fullydepressed in order to move the shiftlever from the "P" (Park) position toany of the other positions

C090F01A-AAT

o 2 (Second gear):

Use for driving on a slippery road, hill

climbing or engine braking downhill. "2"automatically shifts between first andsecond gears.This means that no shift-up to 3rd gear isperformed. However, the shift-up to thirdgear is done when the car speed ex-ceeds a certain value to prevent the en-

C090C01A-AAT

o R(Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the

car to a complete stop before shifting theselector lever to "R" position.

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position the transaxle is in

Page 155: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 155/271

any of the other positions.

o It is always possible to shift from"R", "N", "D", "2", "L" position to "P"position.

C090G01A-AAT

o L (Low gear):

Use for driving up a very steep grade or

for engine braking when descendingsteep hills. When downshifting to "L", thetransaxle will temporarily remain in sec-ond gear until the vehicle has slowedenough for low gear to engage. Do notexceed 31 mph (50 km/h) in low gear.

pgine from over-revving.Manually move the selector to "D" return-ing to normal driving condition.

In the N position, the transaxle is inneutral position, which means that nogears are engaged. The engine can bestarted with the shift lever in "N" position,although this is not recommended exceptif the engine stalls while the car is mov-ing.

C090E02A-AAT

o D (Drive):Use for normal driving. Bring the car to acomplete stop before shifting the selectorto "D" position. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four-gear se-quence. Never downshift manually to "2"position or "L" position when vehicle

speed is more than 60 mph (96 km/h).

Page 156: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 156/271

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

12

WARNING:

o Always buckle-up! In a collision, anunbelted occupant is significantlymore likely to be seriously injured orkilled than a properly belted occu-pant.

o Avoid high speeds when corneringor turning.

o Do not make q ick steering heel

!o Exercise extreme caution when driv-

ing on a slippery surface. Be espe-cially careful when braking, accelerat-

ing or shifting gears. On a slipperysurface, an abrupt change in vehiclespeed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go outof control.

o Optimum vehicle performance andeconomy is obtained by smoothly de-pressing and releasing the accelera

C090N07A-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever

from "P" or "N" to any other positionwith the accelerator pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector leverinto "P" when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stoppedbefore you attempt to shift into "R" or"D".

Page 157: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 157/271

o Do not make quick steering wheel

movements, such as sharp lanechanges or fast, sharp turns.o The risk of rollover is greatly in-

creased if you lose control of yourvehicle at highway speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadwayand the driver oversteers to reenter

the roadway.o In the event your vehicle leaves theroadway, do not steer sharply. In-stead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

pressing and releasing the accelera-

tor pedal.o Turn the overdrive switch on for goodfuel economy and smooth driving. Ifengine braking is needed in the "D"range or if repeated upshifting anddownshifting between the 3rd and 4thgear is needed when climbing a gentleslope, it is recommended that the over-

drive switch be turned off. Turn theoverdrive switch back on immediatelyafterward.

o Never take the car out of gear andcoast down a hill. This may be ex-tremely hazardous. Always leave thecar in gear when moving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This cancause them to overheat and malfunc-tion. Instead, when you are drivingdown a long hill, slow down and shiftto a lower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lowergear. Otherwise, the lower gear maynot be engaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do notdepend on placing the transaxle in "P"to keep the car from moving.

13

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

!o If your vehicle becomes stuck insnow, mud, sand, etc., then you may

attempt to rock the vehicle free bymoving it forward and backward. Donot attempt this procedure if peopleor objects are anywhere near thevehicle. During the rocking opera-tion the vehicle may suddenly move

WARNING: ! WARNING:

ABS will not prevent accidents due toimproper or dangerous driving maneu-vers. Even though vehicle control isimproved during emergency braking,always maintain a safe distance be-tween you and objects ahead. Vehiclespeeds should always be reduced dur-ing extreme road conditions

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYS-TEM

C120A01MC-AAT

(If Installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is

designed to prevent wheel lock-up dur-ing sudden braking or on hazardous roadsurfaces. The ABS control module moni-tors the wheel speed and controls thepressure applied to each brake. Thus, inemergency situations or on slick roads,ABS will increase vehicle control duringb ki

Page 158: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 158/271

tion the vehicle may suddenly move

forward of backward as it becomesunstuck, causing injury to nearbypeople or damage to objects.

ing extreme road conditions.

The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system maybe longer than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the veicleshould be driven at reduced speeds.

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered

roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is

pitted or has different surface height.

These roads should be driven at re-duced speeds. The safety features ofan ABS equipped vehicle should not betested by high speed driving or corner-ing. This could endanger the safety ofyourself or others.

braking.

NOTE:o A click sound may be heard in the

engine compartment when the ve-hicle begins to move after the engineis started. These conditions are nor-mal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning prop-erly.

o During ABS operation, a slight pulsa-tion may be felt in the brake pedalwhen the brakes are applied. Also, anoise may be heard in the enginecompartment while braking. Theseconditions are normal and indicatethat the anti-lock brake system isfunctioning properly.

Page 159: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 159/271

Page 160: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 160/271

Page 161: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 161/271

Page 162: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 162/271

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

18

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather

where you drive your car, you shouldcarry appropriate emergency equipment.Some of the items you may want to carryinclude tire chains, tow straps or chains,flashlight, emergency flares, sand, ashovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket,etc.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an

approved de-icer fluid or glycerine intothe key opening. If a lock is covered withice, squirt it with an approved de-icingfluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozeninternally, you may be able to thaw it outby using a heated key. Handle the heatedkey with care to avoid injury.

C160I01A-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake

can freeze in the engaged position. Thisis most likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around ornear the rear brakes or if the brakes arewet. If you think the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily whileyou put the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic) or in first or reverse gear

Page 163: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 163/271

C160H01A-AAT

Use Approved Anti-Freeze in Win-dow Washer System

To keep the water in the window washersystem from freezing, add an approvedanti-freeze solution in accordance withinstructions on the container. Windowwasher anti-freeze is available fromHyundai dealers and most auto partsoutlets. Do not use engine coolant orother types of anti-freeze as these maydamage the finish.

( ) g

(manual transaxle) and block the rearwheels so the car cannot roll. Then re-lease the parking brake.

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and icecan build up under the fenders and inter-fere with the steering. When driving insevere winter conditions where this mayhappen, you should periodically checkunderneath the car to be sure the move-ment of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

19

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

!

USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correctoperation and always keep them clean.

When driving during the day in conditionsof poor visibility, it is helpful to drive withheadlights on low beam. This enablesyou to be seen, as well as to see.

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A02A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:

Adjust the tire inflation pressures for high-way driving. Low tire inflation pressureswill result in overheating and possiblefailure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires whichmay result in reduced traction or tire fail-ure.

o Driving on tires with no or insuffi-cient tread is dangerous. Worn-outtires can result in loss of vehiclecontrol, collisions, injury, and evendeath. Worn-out tires should be re-placed as soon as possible andshould never be used for driving.Always check tire tread before driv-

WARNING:

Page 164: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 164/271

!

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire infla-tion pressure shown on the tires.

WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires

can cause poor handling, loss of ve-hicle control, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, andeven death. Always check tires areproperly inflated before driving. Referto pages 2-20 and 8-3 for proper tirepressures and further information.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuelthan urban motoring. Do not forget tocheck both engine coolant and engine

oil.3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may resultin overheating of the engine.

ing your car. Refer to 8-12 for furtherinformation and tread limits.

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

20 TRAILER TOWING

C190A01A-AAT

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01MC-AAT

Tire and Loading Information LabelType A

Type C

Page 165: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 165/271

Your Hyundai should not be used to towa trailer. It is designed to be compact andlight for good fuel economy, and is notdesigned as a trailer-towing vehicle.Damages or malfunctions caused by tow-ing may not be covered by the limitedwarranties applying to your Hyundai.Damages or malfunctions that result fromtowing a trailer for commercial purposesare specifically not covered by Hyundailimited warranties.

C190A01MC

OMC040405

OMC040406

Type B

OMC040407

OMC040408

Type D

21

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

Steps For Determining Correct LoadLimit -1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's placard.

2. Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that willbe riding in your vehicle.

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

Vehicle capacity weight:849 lbs (385 kg)

However the seating capacity may bereduced based upon the weight of allof the occupants, and the weight of thecargo being carried or towed. Do notoverload the vehicle as there is a limitto the total weight, or load limit includ-ing occupants and cargo, the vehiclecan carry.

Towingcapacity:

Page 166: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 166/271

3. Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs. and

there will be five 150 lb passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs.(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

849 lbs (385 kg)Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-mum combined weight of occupantsand cargo.

Seating capacity:Total: 5 persons

(Front seat: 2 persons,Rear seat: 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum num-ber of occupants including a driver,your vehicle may carry.

Towing capacity:We do not recommend using this ve-hicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity:The cargo capacity of your vehicle willincrease or decrease depending on the

weight and the number of occupants.

Page 167: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 167/271

23

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI 2

C190G03JM-AAT

Compliance LabelRefer to your vehicle’s tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle’s capacityweight and seating positions. The com-bined weight of the driver, passengersand cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s capacity weight.

Example 3

Page 168: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 168/271

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The label shows the maximum allow-able weight of the fully loaded vehicle.This is called the GVWR (Gross Ve-hicle Weight Rating). The GVWR in-cludes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01AC190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

A B C

Page 169: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 169/271

Page 170: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 170/271

If the Engine Will Not Start ........................................... 3-2Jump Starting................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ............................................... 3-4Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ................... 3-5Spare Tire ................................................................... 3-10

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3

Page 171: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 171/271

If You Have a Flat Tire ............................................... 3-11Changing a Flat Tire ................................................... 3-11If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed ................................. 3-16Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-18If You Lose Your Keys ............................................... 3-20 3

Page 172: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 172/271

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

D010D01A-AAT

If the Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep-

ing a straight line. Move cautiously offthe road to a safe place.2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your

vehicle will not start, contact a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assis-tance.

D020A02A-AAT o If you should accidentally get acid onyour skin or in your eyes, immediatelyremove any contaminated clothingand flush the area with clear water forat least 15 minutes. Then promptlyobtain medical attention. If you mustbe transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the af-fected area with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery dur-ing the jump-start operation is highlyexplosive. Do not smoke or allow a

k fl i h i i i

Page 173: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 173/271

! WARNING:The gas produced by the battery duringthe jump-start operation is highly ex-plosive. If these instructions are notfollowed exactly, serious personal in-jury and damage to the vehicle mayoccur! If you are not sure how to followthis procedure, seek qualified assis-tance. Automobile batteries contain sul-furic acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wearprotective glasses and be careful not toget acid on yourself, your clothing or onthe car.

D020A02MCspark or open flame in the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jump start must be 12-volt. If you can-not determine that it is a 12-volt bat-tery, do not attempt to use it for the

jump start.o To jump start a car with a discharged

battery, follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed inanother vehicle, be sure the two ve-hicles are not touching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights andaccessories in both vehicles.

F020100AUN-EU

If the Engine Stalls at a Crossroad orCrossing

If the engine stalls at a crossroad orcrossing, set the shift lever in theN(Neutral) position and then push thevehicle to a safe place.

34

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates over-heating, you experience a loss of power,or hear loud pinging or knocking, theengine is probably too hot. If this hap-pens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon asit is safe to do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P"(automatic), or neutral (manual

transaxle) and set the parking brake Ifh i di i i i ff

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cablein the exact location shown on theprevious page. First, attach one clampof the jumper cable to the positive (+)post or cable of the discharged battery.Then attach the other end of the samecable to the positive (+) post or cableof the booster battery. Next, using theother cable, attach one clamp to thenegative (-) post or cable of the boosterbattery. Then attach the other end ofthat cable to a solid metal part of theengine away from the battery Do not

If you do not know why your battery be-came discharged (because the lights wereleft on, etc.), have the charging systemchecked by your Hyundai dealer.

Page 174: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 174/271

transaxle) and set the parking brake. Ifthe air conditioner is on, turn it off.3. If coolant is running out under the car

or steam is coming out from under-neath the hood, stop the engine. Donot open the hood until the coolanthas stopped running or the steaminghas stopped. If there is no visible loss

of coolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to be surethe engine cooling fan is operating. Ifthe fan is not running, turn the engineoff.

4. Check to see if the water pump drivebelt is missing. If it is not missing,check to see that it is tight. If the drive

belt seems to be satisfactory, check forcoolant leaking from the radiator, hosesor under the car. (If the air conditionerhad been in use, it is normal for coldwater to be draining from it when youstop).

engine away from the battery. Do notconnect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with thebooster battery and let it run for a fewminutes. This will help to assure thatthe booster battery is fully charged.During the jumping operation, run theengine in this vehicle at about 2000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with thedischarged battery using the normalstarting procedure. After the enginestarts, leave the jumper cables con-nected and let the engine run at fastidle or about 2000 rpm for several

minutes.6. Carefully remove the jumper cables inthe reverse order of attachment.

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

5

! WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hands,long hair and clothing away from mov-ing parts such as the fan and drive beltsto prevent injury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is brokenor coolant is leaking out, stop the en-gine immediately and call the nearestHyundai dealer for assistance

6. If you cannot find the cause of theoverheating, wait until the engine tem-perature has returned to normal. Then,if coolant has been lost, carefully addwater to the reservoir (Page 6-8) tobring the fluid level in the reservoir upto the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert forfurther signs of overheating. If over-heating happens again, call a Hyundaidealer for assistance.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR-ING SYSTEM (TPMS)

C320A01MC-AAT

(If Installed)

Page 175: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 175/271

!

Hyundai dealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. This may result incoolant being blown out of the opening

and cause serious burns.

! CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates thereis a leak in the cooling system and thisshould be checked as soon as possibleby a Hyundai dealer.

C320A01TG

➀ Low Tire Pressure Telltale➁ TPMS Malfunction Indicator

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthlywhen cold and inflated to the inflationpressure recommended by the vehiclemanufacturer on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label. (If yourvehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label,you should determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

36

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

Low Tire Pressure Telltale

When the tire pressure monitoring sys-tem warning telltale is illuminated, oneor more of your tires is significantlyunder-inflated.Immediately reduce your speed, avoidhard cornering and anticipate increasedstopping distances. You should stopand check your tires as soon as pos-

sible Inflate the tires to the proper

As an added safety feature, your ve-hicle has been equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressuretelltale when one or more of your tiresis significantly under-inflated. Accord-ingly, when the low tire pressure tell-tale illuminates, you should stop andcheck your tires as soon as possible,and inflate them to the proper pres-sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

Your vehicle has also been equippedwith a TPMS malfunction indicator toindicate when the system is not oper-

ating properly. The TPMS malfunctionindicator is provided by a separatetelltale, which displays the symbol"TPMS" when illuminated. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, thesystem may not be able to detect orsignal low tire pressure as intended.TPMS malfunctions may occur for avariety of reasons including the instal

Page 176: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 176/271

sible. Inflate the tires to the properpressure as indicated on the vehicle’splacard or tire inflation pressure labellocated on the driver’s side centerpillar outer panel. If you cannot reacha service station or if the tire cannothold the newly added air, replace the

low pressure tire with the temporaryspare tire. Then the TPMS malfunc-tion indicator or the Low Tire Pressuretelltale may turn on after restarting andabout 20 minutes of continuous drivingbefore you have the low-pressure tirerepaired and replaced on the vehicle.

inflated tire causes the tire to overheatand can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect thevehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not asubstitute for proper tire maintenance,and it is the driver’s responsibility tomaintain correct tire pressure, even ifunder-inflation has not reached thelevel to trigger illumination of the TPMSlow tire pressure telltale.

variety of reasons, including the instal-lation of replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctionindicator after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alter-nate tires and wheels allow the TPMSto continue to function properly.

Page 177: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 177/271

Page 178: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 178/271

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

9

!CAUTION:o Do not use any tire sealant if your

vehicle is equipped with a TirePressure Monitoring System. Theliquid sealant can damage thetire pressure sensors.

o In order for the system to cor-rectly monitor tires for under-in-flation, there should be a total ofexactly 4 sensors fitted to each of

!WARNING - TPMS

o The TPMS cannot alert you tosevere and sudden tire damagecaused by external factors suchas nails or road debris.

o If you feel any vehicle instability,immediately take your foot off theaccelerator, apply the brakesgradually and with light force,and slowly move to a safe posi-

This device complies with Part 15of the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired op-eration.

Page 179: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 179/271

!

!y

the four driven wheel positions.There should be no other sen-sors in the vehicle including sparetire since this could cause thesystem to monitor the wrong sen-sors.

WARNING:Tampering with, modifying, or dis-abling the Tire Pressure MonitoringSystem (TPMS) components mayinterfere with the system's ability towarn the driver of low tire pressureconditions and/or TPMS malfunc-tions. Tampering with, modifying,or disabling the Tire Pressure Moni-toring System (TPMS) componentsmay void the warranty for that por-tion of the vehicle.

y ption off the road.

WARNING:Changes or modifications not ex-pressly approved by the party re-sponsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment.

Page 180: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 180/271

Page 181: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 181/271

312

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

Flat tire

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the WheelD060B01MC-AAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and ToolD060K01FC-AAT

Wheel Cap (If Installed)

Page 182: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 182/271

D060C02MC

Block the wheel that is diagonallyopposite from the flat to keep thevehicle from rolling when the car israised on the jack.

Remove the spare tire and remove the jack and tool bag from the trunk.

NOTE:The spare tire and tool is locatedbeneath the luggage mat in the ve-hicle trunk or luggage compartment.

D060B01MC-A

1. Wrap a piece of cloth around the tipof the flat-head screwdriver to avoidscratching.

2. Insert the flat-head screwdriver intothe notch of the wheel cap and prygently to remove the wheel cap.

3. Change the flat tire.4. Reinstall the wheel cap by fitting

the boss of the wheel cap in thenotch of the wheel, hitting the cen-

ter of the wheel cap with your hand.

D060K02MC

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

13

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in PlaceD060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel NutsD060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

Wrench bar

Wh l h

Page 183: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 183/271

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

1JBA6025

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. Toloosen the nuts, turn the wrenchhandle counterclockwise. When doing

this, be sure that the socket is seatedcompletely over the nut so it cannotslip off. For maximum leverage, posi-tion the wrench so the handle is to theright. Then, while holding the wrenchnear the end of the handle, pull up onit with steady pressure. Do not re-

move the nuts at this time. Just loosenthem about one-half turn.

D060D02MC

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrenchbar into the jack as shown in thedrawing. To raise the vehicle, turn thewheel nut wrench clockwise. As the

jack begins to raise the vehicle, doublecheck that it is properly positioned andwill not slip. If the jack is on softground or sand, place a board, brick,flat stone or other object under the

base of the jack to keep it from sink-ing.Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.

Wheel nut wrenchD060F02MC

Page 184: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 184/271

Page 185: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 185/271

Page 186: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 186/271

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

17

CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care

not to cause damage to the bumperor underbody of the vehicle.

1) If the vehicle is being towed with therear wheels on the ground, be sure theparking brake is released.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of theautomatic transaxle fluid. If it is belowthe "HOT" range on the dipstick, addfluid. If you cannot add fluid, a towingdolly must be used.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspen-

sion components are damaged or thevehicle is being towed with the front

!D080B01O-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

1)

2)

Page 187: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 187/271

!

wheels on the ground, use a towingdolly under the front wheels.

o Manual Transaxle:If you do not use a towing dolly, placethe ignition key in the "ACC" positionand put the transaxle in "N (Neutral)".

CAUTION:Do not tow with the key removed or inthe "LOCK" position when towing fromthe rear without a towing dolly.

D080B02MC

o Do not tow with sling type truck asthis may cause damage to thebumper or underbody of the vehicle.

D080B01MC

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lifttype truck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment(3).

3) dolly

Page 188: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 188/271

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

19

CAUTION:- Automatic Transaxle

o If the car is being towed with all fourwheels on the ground, it can be towedonly from the front. Be sure that the

transaxle is in neutral. Be sure thesteering is unlocked by placing theig iti it h i th ACC iti A

!

OMC045014

(2)Take out the towing hook from the jack

How to Use Front Towing Hook (If Installed)

NOTE:Place the towing hook & towing holecover in its original position when not inuse.

Page 189: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 189/271

ignition switch in the ACC position. Adriver must be in the towed vehicleto operate the steering and brakes.

o To avoid serious damage to the au-tomatic transaxle, limit the vehiclespeed to 10 mph (15 km/h) and drive

less than 1 mile (1.5 km) when tow-ing.

OMC045013

(1)Open the towing hole cover by push-ing it with your finger.

( ) g jcase. To mount the towing hook, ro-tate it clockwise.

NOTE:The jack case is located on the sparetire in the trunk or luggage compart-ment.

! CAUTIONIt should be tightened firmly with yourfingers until there is no more play in thetowing hole. Towing hook is located inthe jack case on the spare tire.

(3)Attach a tow cable, chain or strap to thetowing hook on the front bumper.

320

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundaidealers can make you a new key if youhave your key number.If you lock the keys inside your car andyou cannot obtain a new key, manyHyundai dealers can use special tools toopen the door for you.

Page 190: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 190/271

Page 191: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 191/271

4

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosionon your car are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that isallowed to accumulate underneath thecar.

o Removal of paint or protective coat-ings by stones, gravel, abrasion orminor scrapes and dents which leaveunprotected metal exposed to corro-sion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Cor-rosion

By using the most advanced design andconstruction practices to combat corro-sion, Hyundai produces cars of the high-est quality. However, this is only part ofthe job. To achieve the long term corro-sion resistance your Hyundai can deliver,the owner's cooperation and assistanceis also required.

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in whichcorrosion is most likely to occur. For ex-ample, corrosion is accelerated by highhumidity, particularly when temperaturesare just above freezing. In such condi-tions, the corrosive material is kept incontact with the car surfaces by moisturethat is slow to evaporate.Mud is a particular enemy of corrosionprotection because it is slow to dry andholds moisture in contact with the ve-hicle. Even though the mud appears to

Page 192: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 192/271

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car isregularly exposed to corrosive materials,corrosion protection is particularly impor-tant. Some of the common causes ofaccelerated corrosion are road salts, dustcontrol chemicals, ocean air and indus-trial pollution.

be dry, it can still retain moisture andpromote corrosion.High temperatures can also acceleratecorrosion of parts that are not properlyventilated so the moisture can be dis-persed. For all these reasons, it is par-ticularly important to keep your car cleanand free of mud or accumulations of othermaterials. This applies not only on thevisible surfaces but particularly to theunderside of the car.

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3TO HELP PREVENT COR-ROSION

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion fromgetting started by observing the follow-ing:

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is tokeep your car clean and free of corrosivematerials. Attention to the underside ofthe car is particularly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area —

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly

ventilated garage. This creates a favor-able environment for corrosion. This isparticularly true if you wash your car in

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condi-tion

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon aspossible to reduce the possibility of cor-rosion. If bare metal is showing through,the attention of a qualified body and paintshop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly

corrosive and may damage painted sur-faces in just a few hours. Always removebird droppings as soon as possible.

o When cleaning lower door panels,rocker panels and frame members, besure that drain holes are kept open sothat moisture can escape and not be

trapped inside to ac-celerate corro-sion.

Page 193: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 193/271

where road salts are used, near theocean, areas with industrial pollution,acid rain, etc.— you should take extracare to prevent corrosion. In winter,hose off the underside of your car at

least once a month and be sure toclean the underside thoroughly whenwinter is over.

o When cleaning underneath the car,give particular attention to the compo-nents under the fenders and otherareas that are hidden from view.Do a thorough job; just dampening the

accumulated mud rather than washingit away will accelerate corrosion ratherthan prevent it. Water under high pres-sure and steam are particularly effec-tive in removing accumulated mud andcorrosive materials.

particularly true if you wash your car inthe garage or drive it into the garagewhen it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage cancontribute to corrosion unless it is wellventilated so moisture is dispersed.

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor matsand carpeting to cause corrosion. Checkunder the mats periodically to be sure thecarpeting is dry. Use particular care if youcarry fertilizers, cleaning materials orchemicals in the car.These should be carried only in propercontainers and any spills or leaks shouldbe cleaned up, flushed with clear waterand thoroughly dried.

Page 194: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 194/271

Page 195: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 195/271

4

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

6

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first removeloose dirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner.Then apply a solution of mild soap ordetergent and water using a clean spongeor soft cloth. Allow this to stay on thesurface to loosen the dirt, then wipe witha clean damp sponge or cloth. If all thedirt stains are not removed, repeat thisprocedure until the upholstery is clean.Do not use gasoline, solvent, paint thin-ner or other strong cleaners.

CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car againwhen water no longer beads on a cleansurface but spreads out over a largerarea.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to

preserve the appearance of the bumperson your Hyundai. They are:

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather up-holstered surfaces will, like any material,pick-up dust and dirt. This dust and dirtmust be cleaned off or it may work into thesurface of the leather, causing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should becleaned when necessary. Washingleather thoroughly with soap and waterwill keep your leather lustrous, beautifuland ensure you have many years of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using

Page 196: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 196/271

o Be careful not to spill battery electro-lyte or hydraulic brake fluid on thebumpers. If you do, wash it off imme-diately with clean water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper

surfaces. They are made of soft plasticand the surface can be damaged ifmistreated. Do not use abrasive clean-ers. Use warm water and mild soap orcarwashing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to hightemperatures. For example, if you haveyour car repainted, do not leave the

bumpers on the car if the car is goingto be placed in a high-temperaturepaint booth.

Take a piece of cheese cloth and usingany mild soap and lukewarm water, workup a good lather. Thoroughly wash theleather. Wipe clean with a slightly dampcloth and dry with soft cloth. Do this as

often as the leather becomes soiled.During tanning operations, sufficient oilsare incorporated through processing thatnone need be applied during the life ofthe leather. Oil applied to the finishedsurface will in no way help the leatherand may do more harm than good. Var-

nishes and furniture polishes shouldnever be used under any conditions.

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

7ANY QUESTIONS?

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the careof your car, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth orsponge with mild soap or detergent andwarm water. Do not use strong deter-gents, dye, bleach or abrasive materialson the seat belts as this may weaken thefabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them forexcessive wear, cuts, fraying or othersigns of damage and replace them ifnecessary.

! CAUTION:When cleaning leather products (steer-

ing wheel, seats etc.), use neutral de-tergents or low alcohol content solu-tions. If you use high alcohol contentsolutions or acid/alkaline detergents,the color of the leather may fade or thesurface may get stripped off.

Page 197: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 197/271

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household windowcleaner on the windows. However, whencleaning the inside of the rear window becareful not to damage the rear windowdefroster wiring.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Clean-ers of this type are available in aerosol

cans in liquid form or powder. Read theinstructions and follow them exactly. Us-ing a vacuum cleaner with the appropri-ate attachment, remove as much dirt fromthe carpets as possible. Apply the foamfollowing the manufacturer's directions,then rub in overlapping circles. Do notadd water. These cleaners work bestwhen the carpet is kept as dry as pos-sible.

Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ............................................... 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............ 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items ............. 5-7California Perchlorate Notice ...................................... 5-10

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

Page 198: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 198/271

5 5

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2 MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatestnumber of miles of satisfying operationfrom your Hyundai, certain maintenanceprocedures must be performed. Althoughcareful design and engineering have re-duced these to a minimum, those that arerequired are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have thesemaintenance procedures performed tocomply with the terms of the warrantiescovering your new Hyundai. The Owner'sHandbook supplied with your new ve-hicle provides further information about

F010D01A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you shouldperform when you drive your Hyundai oryou fill the fuel tank. A list of these itemswill be found on page 6-4.

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as in-spections, adjustments and replacementsthat are listed in the maintenance chartsstarting on page 5-4. These proceduresmust be performed at the intervals shownin the maintenance schedule to assurethat your warranty remains in effect. Al-though it is strongly recommended thatthey be performed by the factory-trainedor distributor-trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures maybe performed at any qualified servicefacility.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a

few tools that are required and want totake the time to do so, you can inspectand service a number of items. For moreinformation about doing it yourself see

Page 199: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 199/271

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for yourHyundai can be divided into three mainareas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

pthese warranties.

yIt is suggested that genuine Hyundaiservice parts be used for any requiredrepairs or replacements. Other parts ofequivalent quality such as engine oil,engine coolant, manual or auto transaxleoil, brake fluid and so on which are notsupplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affect-ing your warranty coverage but you shouldalways be sure these are equivalent tothe quality of the original Hyundai parts.Your Owner's Handbook provides furtherinformation about your warranty cover-age.

information about doing it yourself, seeSection 6.

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3SCHEDULED MAINTE-NANCE REQUIREMENTS

F020A02A-AAT

o Inspection should be performed anytime a malfunction is experienced orsuspected.

o Receipts for all emission control sys-tem services should be retained todemonstrate compliance with condi-tions of the emissions system war-ranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles(240,000 km), continue to follow theprescribed maintenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance re-quirements, see page 5-6 of this sec-tion.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundaiserviced, keep copies of the servicerecords in your glove box. This willhelp ensure that you can documentthat the required procedures have beenperformed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially importantwhen service is not performed by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own mainte-nance and repairs, you may find ithelpful to have an official HyundaiShop Manual. A copy of this publica-

Page 200: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 200/271

tion may be purchased at your Hyundaidealer's parts department.

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

150

240

120

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

No. DESCRIPTION

1

2

7.5

12

6

15

24

12

22.5

36

18

30

48

24

37.5

60

30

45

72

36

52.5

84

42

R

60

96

48

67.5

108

54

75

120

60

82.5

132

66

90

144

72

97.5

156

78

105

168

84

R

112.5

180

90

120

192

96

127.5

204

102

135

216

108

142.5

228

114

F030B02MC-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

F030A01A-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to assure good vehicle control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicleservices to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occursfirst.

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months

Page 201: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 201/271

I

I

I

RR

R

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM HOSE

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTERFUEL TANK AIR FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

3

4

5

67

8

I

I

I

II

I

I

I

I

I

RR

R

I

I

I

II

I

I

I

I

I

RR

R

I I

II

I

I

I

I

RR

R

I

I

I

II

I

I

I

I

I

RR

R

I

I

I

II

I

I

Page 202: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 202/271

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

6

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTERAIR CLEANER FILTERSPARK PLUGSBRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS,PARKING BRAKESTEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE

RRRI

I

I

MAINTENANCEOPERATIONMAINTENANCE ITEM

EVERY 3,750 MILES (6,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHSMORE FREQUENTLYMORE FREQUENTLYMORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, KC, EB, HC, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

F040A02MC-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart belowfor the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

Page 203: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 203/271

& BOOTS/LOWER ARM BALL JOINTDRIVESHAFTS AND BOOTSTIMING BELTMANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUIDCLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER

I

IRR

RR

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHSEVERY 60,000 MILES OR 72 MONTHSEVERY 80,000 MILES (120,000 KM)

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)MORE FREQUENTLY

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONSA - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in normal

temperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing temperatureB - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances

C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very coldweather

E - Driving in sandy areasF - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, E, FB, C, D, E, F, G, IA, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

A, C, E, F, G, H, IC, E

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

7EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULEDMAINTENANCE ITEMS

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses andConnections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-nections for leakage and damage. Havea trained techincian, replace any dam-aged or leaking parts immediately.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed atwhich the vehicle may be driven, damagethe emission system and cause hard start-ing. If an excessive amount of foreign

tt l t i th f l t k th

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should bechanged at the intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. If the car is beingdriven in severe conditions, more fre-quent oil and filter changes are required.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter isrecommended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap shouldbe inspected at those intervals specifiedin the maintenance schedule. Make surethat a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap iscorrectly replaced.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, Crankcase VentilationHoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidenceof heat and/or mechanical damage. Hardand brittle rubber cracking tears cuts F060J01A AAT

Page 204: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 204/271

matter accumulates in the fuel tank, thefilter may require replacement more fre-quently.After installing a new filter, run the enginefor several minutes, and check for leaksat the connections.Fuel filters should be installed by trainedtechnicians.

and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts,abrasions, and excessive swelling indi-cate deterioration. Particular attentionshould be paid to examine those hosesurfaces nearest to high heat sources,such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure thatthe hoses do not come in contact with anyheat source, sharp edges or moving com-ponent which might cause heat damageor mechanical wear. Inspect all hoseconnections, such as clamps and cou-plings, to make sure they are secure, andthat no leaks are present. Hoses shouldbe replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

F060B01A-AAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturationand replace if necessary. Drive beltsshould be checked periodically for propertension and adjusted as necessary.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs ofthe correct heat range.

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

8

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums/Linings,Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and liningsfor scoring, burning, leaking fluid, brokenparts, and excessive wear. Inspect the

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation,chafing, cracks, deterioration and any

leakage. Replace any deteriorated ordamaged parts immediately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT”range of the dipstick, after the engine andtransaxle are at normal operating tem-perature. Check the automatic transaxlefluid level with the engine running andthe transaxle in neutral, with the parkingbrake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SPIII, SK ATF SP III or other brands meeting

the SP III specification approved byHyundai Motor Co. when adding or chang-ing fluid. Using the wrong ATF may resultin damage to the ATM.

F070D01A AAT

F060E01A-AAT

o Timing Belt

Inspect all parts related to the timing beltfor damage and deformation. Replace

any damaged parts immediately.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance

schedule.

Page 205: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 205/271

parking brake system including the park-ing brake lever and cables. For detailedservice procedures, refer to the ShopManual.

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluidreservoir. The level should be between"MIN" and "MAX" marks on the side of thereservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluidconforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4.

F070D01A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possibleleaks before adding oil. Do not overfill.

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

9

F070M01A-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage &Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off,check for excessive free-play in the steer-ing wheel. Check the linkage for bends ordamage. Check the dust boots and ball

joints for deterioration, cracks, or dam-age. Replace any damaged parts.F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muf-fler and hangers for cracks, deterioration,or damage. Start the engine and listencarefully for any exhaust gas leakage.Tighten connections or replace parts asnecessary

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discsfor run out and wear, and calipers for fluid

leakage.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and con-nections for leakage and damage. Checkair conditioning performance accordingto the relevant shop manual if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Driveshafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clampsfor cracks, deterioration, or damage. Re-

place any damaged parts and, if neces-sary, repack the grease.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt andHoses

Check the power steering pump and

Page 206: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 206/271

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting BoltsCheck the suspension connections forlooseness or damage. Retighten to thespecified torque.

necessary. Check the power steering pump andhoses for leakage and damage. Replaceany damaged or leaking parts immedi-ately. Inspect the power steering belt forevidence of cuts, cracks, excessive wear,oiliness and proper tension. Replace oradjust it if necessary.

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

10 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATENOTICE

F080A01NF-AAT

Perchlorate Material-special handlingmay apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:Perchlorate containing materials, suchas airbag inflators, seatbelt pretensionersand keyless remote entry batteries, mustbe disposed of according to Title 22 Cali-fornia Code of Regulations Section67384.10 (a).

Page 207: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 207/271

Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-4Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-5Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ..................................... 6-9Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-12Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-12Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-14

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6

Page 208: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 208/271

Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6 14Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-15Changing the Climate Control Air Filter ....................... 6-16Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-17Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-20Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-22Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-23Bulb Wattage............................................................... 6-29Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-30

6 6

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2 ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010A01MC-AAT

Type A

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicingthe engine, you should handletools and other heavy objectscarefully so that the plasticcover of the engine is not dam-

!

Page 209: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 209/271

1. Engine coolant reservoir .......... 6-8

2. Engine oil filler cap .................. 6-73. Brake fluid reservoir ............... 6-144. Air cleaner filter ........................ 6-9

5. Windshield washer fluid

reservoir cap ........................... 6-116. Power steering fluid reservoir(If Installed) ............................. 6-22

7. Engine oil level dipstick ........... 6-6

8. Radiator cap ............................. 6-8

9. Automatic transaxle fluid leveldipstick (If Installed) ................ 6-1310. Battery ..................................... 6-2011. Fuse/Relay box ....................... 6-17

OMC059036

cover of the engine is not damaged.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

G010A01MC-AAT

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicingthe engine, you should handletools and other heavy objectscarefully so that the plasticcover of the engine is not dam-

!

Type B

Page 210: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 210/271

1. Engine oil filler cap .................. 6-7

2. Brake fluid reservoir ............... 6-143. Air cleaner filter ........................ 6-94. Fuse/Relay box ....................... 6-17

5. Windshield washer fluid

reservoir cap ........................... 6-116. Power steering fluid reservoir(If Installed) ............................. 6-22

7. Engine oil level dipstick ........... 6-6

8. Radiator cap ............................. 6-8

9. Automatic transaxle fluid leveldipstick (If Installed) ................ 6-1310. Engine coolant reservoir .......... 6-811. Battery ..................................... 6-20

OMC059036L

gaged.

Page 211: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 211/271

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

5CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performanceand service of the engine. It is suggestedthat you check the oil level at least once

a week in normal use and more often ifyou are on a trip or driving in severeconditions.

G030B02O-AAT

Recommended Oil

MAINTENANCE PRECAU-TIONS

!G020D01TG-GAT

Improper or incomplete service may re-sult in problems. This section gives in-structions only for the maintenance items

that are easy to perform.Several procedures should be done byan authorized Hyundai dealer.

NOTE:Improper owner maintenance during thewarranty period may affect warrantycoverage.

WARNING:o Performing maintenance work on a

vehicle can be dangerous. You canbe seriously injured while perform-ing some maintenance procedures.If you lack sufficient knowledge andexperience or the proper tools andequipment to do the work, have itdone by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Working under the hood with the en-gine running is dangerous. It be-comes even more dangerous whenyou wear jewelry or loose clothing.These can become entangled in

Page 212: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 212/271

The engine oil quality should meet thefollowing classification.

API Service SM* or above,

ILSAC GF-4 or above

* If the API service SM engine oil is notavailable in your country, you are ableto use API service SL.

G030B01JM-U

These can become entangled inmoving parts and result in injury.Therefore, if you must run the enginewhile working under the hood, make

certain that you remove all jewelry(especially rings, bracelets, watches,and necklaces) and all neckties,scarves, and similar loose clothingbefore getting near the engine orcooling fans.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

Before checking the oil, warm up theengine to the normal operating tempera-

OMC059003

NOTE:o SAE 5W-20 (5W-30), ILSAC GF-4 en-

gine oil is preferred regardless ofregional option and engine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-4 engine oilis not available, SAE 5W-30 or sec-ondary recommended engine oil forcorresponding temperature rangecan be used.

! WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radia-tor hose when checking the engine oilas it may be hot enough to burn you.

Page 213: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 213/271

g p g pture and be sure it is parked on levelground. Turn the engine off.

Wait five minutes, then remove the dip-stick, wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstickand withdraw it again. Then note thehighest level the oil has reached on thedipstick. It should be between the upper("F") and lower ("L") range.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

7

! CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil byusing a funnel. Do not overfill so as notto damage engine.

! WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radia-tor hose when adding the engine oil asit may be hot enough to burn you.

G030D03MC-AAT

Adding Oil

If the oil level is close to or below the "L"mark, add oil until it reaches the "F" mark.

OMC059004

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine oil contains chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancer,birth defects and reproductive harm.Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact withthe skin for prolonged periods of time.Always protect your skin by washingyour hands thoroughly with soap andwarm water as soon as possible after

handling used oil.

Page 214: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 214/271

To add oil:

1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it

counterclockwise.2. Add oil, then check the level again. Donot overfill.

3. Replace the cap by turning it clock-wise.

The distance between the "F" and "L"marks is equal to about 1 quart of oil.

NOTE:o It is recommended that the engine oil

and filter should be changed by an

authorized Hyundai dealer.o Always dispose of used engine oil in

an environmentally acceptable man-ner. It is suggested that it be placedin a sealed container and taken to aservice station for reclaimation. Donot pour the oil on the ground or putit into the household trash.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

8 CHECKING AND CHANGINGTHE ENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01TG-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap whenthe engine is hot. When the engine ishot, the engine coolant is under pres-sure and may erupt through the open-ing if the cap is removed. You could beseriously burned if you do not observethis precaution. Do not remove the ra-diator cap until the radiator is cool tothe touch.

NOTE:It is recommended that the engine cool-ant should be changed by an authorized

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol cool-ant in a 50/50 mix with water. The engine

coolant should be compatible with alumi-num engine parts. Additional corrosioninhibitors or additives should not be used.The cooling system must be maintainedwith the correct concentration and type ofengine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion.Never allow the concentration of anti-

freeze to exceed the 60% level or gobelow the 35% level or damage to thecoolant system may result. For properconcentration when adding or replacingthe coolant, refer to the following table.

G050C01TG-AAT

To Check the Coolant Level

Type BOMC059005

Type A

Page 215: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 215/271

ant should be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

the coolant, refer to the following table.

Water

65%

60%

50%

40%

Antifreezesolution

35%

40%

50%

60%

Ambienttemperature

°F (°C)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

Engine coolant

concentration

The coolant level can be seen on the sideof the plastic coolant reservoir. The levelof the coolant should be between the "L"and "F" lines on the reservoir when theengine is cool.

OMC059008

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

9

G070A03Y-AAT

The replacement of air cleaner filter isperformed in the following manner.

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.

CHANGING THE AIRCLEANER FILTER

OMC055010

! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolingfan so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the engine cool-ant temperature decreases, the fan willautomatically shut off. This is a normal

condition.

CAUTION:o Engine coolant can damage the fin-

ish of your car. If you spill enginecoolant on the car, wash it off thor-oughly with clean water.

o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-num engine parts and must be pro-t t d b th l l l b

!

If the level is below the "L" mark, addengine coolant to bring it up between "L"and "F". If the level is low, inspect forcoolant leaks and recheck the fluid levelfrequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspectionand diagnosis of the reason.

Page 216: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 216/271

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.2. When this is done, the cover can be

lifted off, the old filter removed and thenew filter put in its place.

Genuine Hyundai replacement parts arerecommended.

tected by an ethylene-glycol basecoolant to prevent corrosion andfreezing.

Do not use hard water. Hard watercan cause engine damage from cor-rosion, overheating or freezing.

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without a

proper air filter in place can result inexcessive engine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter,be careful that dust or dirt does notenter the air intake. These may re-sult in damage to the air cleanerfilter.

!

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

10 WINDSHIELD WIPERBLADES

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefullyinspected from time to time and cleanedto remove accumulations of road film or

other debris. To clean the wiper bladesand arms, use a clean sponge or clothwith a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smearthe glass, replace them with genuineHyundai replacement parts or theirequivalent.

CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry

glass. This can result in more rapidf th i bl d d

! 2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pullup it.

HHR5049

G080B01HR-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise thewiper to the vertical.

To remove the wiper blade

Page 217: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 217/271

wear of the wiper blades and mayscratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contact

with petroleum products such asengine oil, gasoline, etc. 1. Push down the wiper blade with thelocking clip (1) pressed to detach itfrom the wiper arm.

HHR5048

(1)

Page 218: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 218/271

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

12

!

G100A01MC-GAT

Transaxle lubricant in the manualtransaxle should be checked at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-

nance schedule in Section 5.

!

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEOIL (MANUAL)

! CAUTION:o Radiator anti-freeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washersystem because it will damage thecar's finish.

o The washer should not be operatedif the washer reservoir is empty.This can damage the washer fluidpump.

WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxleoil level when the engine is cool or cold.If the engine is hot, you should exercisegreat caution to avoid burning yourselfon hot engine or exhaust parts.

WARNING:o Windshield washer fluid agents con-

tain some amounts of alcohol and NOTE

G110A01MC-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxleshould be checked at those intervalsspecified in the vehicle maintenance

schedule in Section 5.NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basically ared color. As driving distance increases,the fluid color turns darkish red gradu-ally. It is a normal condition and youshould not judge the need to replace

based upon the changing color.You must replace the automatictransaxle fluid in accordance with inter-vals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in section 5.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)

Page 219: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 219/271

can be flammable under certain cir-cumstances. Do not allow sparks orflame to contact the washer fluid orthe washer fluid reservoir. Damageto the vehicle or its occupants couldoccur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poison-ous to humans and animals. Do notdrink windshield washer fluid. Seri-ous injury or death could occur.

NOTE:It is recommended that the manualtransaxle fluid should be checked by an

authorized Hyundai dealer.

Page 220: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 220/271

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

14 CHECKING THE BRAKES

G120A01A-AAT

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to thesafe operation of the car, it is sug-gested that they be checked and in-spected by your Hyundai dealer. Thebrakes should be checked and in-spected for wear at those intervalsspecified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

!! WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by theengine coolant temperature and maysometimes operate even when the en-gine is not running. Use extreme cau-tion when working near the blades ofthe cooling fan, so that you are notinjured by a rotating fan blade. As theengine coolant temperature decreases,the fan will automatically shut off. Thisis a normal condition.

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoirshould be checked periodically. The levelshould be between the "MIN" and "MAX"

OMC055015

Page 221: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 221/271

! WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid.It can damage your vision if it gets intoyour eyes. It will also damage yourvehicle's paint if spilled on it and notremoved immediately.

should be between the MIN and MAXmarks on the side of the reservoir. If thelevel is at or below the "MIN" mark, care-

fully add fluid to bring it up to "MAX". Donot overfill.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

15

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioner Opera-tion

1. Start the engine and let it run at fast

idle for several minutes with the airconditioner set at the maximum coldsetting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dashvents is not cold, have the air condi-tioning system inspected by yourHyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low

f ig t l l d g th

!

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can dam-age your vision if it gets into your eyes.Use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 specificationfluid from a sealed container. Do notallow the fluid can or reservoir to re-main open any longer than required.This will avoid entry of dirt and moisturewhich can damage the brake systemand cause improper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away anydirt, then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap.

AIR CONDITIONER CARE

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioner condenser (and en-gine radiator) should be checked periodi-

cally for accumulation of dirt, dead in-sects, leaves, etc. These can interferewith maximum cooling efficiency. Whenremoving such accumulations, brush orhose them away carefully to avoid bend-ing the cooling fans.

Page 222: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 222/271

refrigerant level may damage the com-pressor.

dirt, then unscrew the fluid reservoir cap.Slowly pour the recommended fluid intothe reservoir. Do not overfill. Carefully

replace the cap on the reservoir andtighten.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

16

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the sealsin the system, the air conditioner should

be run for at least 10 minutes each week.This is particularly important during coolweather when the air conditioning sys-tem is not otherwise in use.

2. Pull out the climate control air filter withthe hooks on both sides pressed.

!

CHANGING THE CLIMATECONTROL AIR FILTER

B145A02MC-GAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)

The climate control air filter is located infront of the evaporator unit behind the

glove box.It helps to decrease the amount of pollut-ants entering the car.

OMC055012

Page 223: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 223/271

CAUTION:Be careful not to press the hooks in theopposite direction.

!

1. Open the glove box and remove theadjusting pins on both sides of theglove box.

B145A01MC

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

17

3. Take out the climate control air filterand replace it with a new one.

4. Installation is the reverse order of dis-assembly.

OMC055013

G200A01A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electricalcircuits from the battery are ever over-loaded, thus preventing damage to the

OMC045003

CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, neveruse anything but a new fusible link withthe same or lower amperage rating.Never use a piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link. This could result inserious damage and create a fire haz-ard.

!

CHECKING AND REPLAC-ING FUSES

Page 224: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 224/271

entire wiring harness. (This could becaused by a short in the system drawingtoo much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine thecause, repair the system and replace thefusible link. The fusible links are locatedin a relay box for easy inspection.

Page 225: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 225/271

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

19

CAUTION:An open fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit If you

!

G200C01CM-GAT

Power ConnectorNOTE:o If the power connector is pulled up

from the fuse panel, the warningchime, audio, clock and interiorlamps, etc., will not operate. The fol-lowing items must be reset after re-placement.- Digital Clock - Trip computer- Automatic heating and cooling con-

trol system- Audio

o Even though the power connector ispulled up, the battery can still bedischarged by operation of the head-lights or other electrical devices.

Your vehicle is equipped with a powerconnector to prevent battery discharge ifyour vehicle is parked without being op

G200F01MC

G200B02L

Good Open-Replace

Page 226: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 226/271

problem in the electrical circuit. If youreplace a fuse and it blows as soon asthe accessory is turned on, the prob-lem is serious and should be referred toa Hyundai dealer for diagnosis and re-pair. Never replace a fuse with anythingexcept a fuse with the same or a loweramperage rating. A higher capacity fusecould cause damage and create a firehazard.

NOTE:See page 6-30 for the fuse panel de-scriptions.

your vehicle is parked without being op-erated for prolonged periods. Use thefollowing procedures before parking thevehicle for prolonged periods.

1. Turn off the engine.2. Turn off the headlights and tail lights.3. Open the driver’s side panel cover and

pull up the power connector.4. Insert the power connector in the op-

posite direction.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

20 CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! Whenworking with batteries carefully ob

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assis-tance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse outyour eyes with water and get medicalassistance as soon as possible. Whileyou are being driven to get medicalassistance, continue to rinse your eyesby using a sponge or soft cloth saturat-ed with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink alarge quantity of water or milk followedby milk of magnesia, eat a raw egg ordrink vegetable oil. Get medical assis-tance as soon as possible.

While batteries are being charged (eitherby a battery charger or by the vehicle's

OMC055018

G210B05A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence ofcorrosion around the battery posts or ter-

minals should be removed using a solu-tion of household baking soda and warmwater. After the battery terminals are dry,cover them with a light coating of grease.

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead com-pounds, chemicals known to the Stateof California to cause cancer, birth de-fects and reproductive harm. Batteriesalso contain other chemicals known toth St t f C lif i t

Page 227: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 227/271

working with batteries, carefully ob-serve the following precautions to avoidserious injuries.

by a battery charger or by the vehicle'salternator), they produce explosive gases.Always observe these warnings to pre-vent injuries from occurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well venti-lated area.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smok-ing in the area.

o Keep children away from the area.

The fluid in the battery contains a strongsolution of sulfuric acid, which is poison-ous and highly corrosive. Be careful notto spill it on yourself or the car. If you dospill battery fluid on yourself, immediatelydo the following:

the State of California to cause cancer.Wash hands after handling.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

21

!

G220A01A-AAT

G220B01A-AAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

WARNING:The radiator fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may some-times operate even when the engine isnot running. Use extreme caution whenworking near the blades of the coolingfan, so that you are not injured by arotating fan blade. As the coolant tem-perature decreases the fan will auto-matically shut off. This is a normal con-dition.

CHECKING ELECTRICCOOLING FANS

!Wear eye protection whencharging or working near abattery.Always provide ventilationwhen working in an enclosedspace.An inappropriately disposedbattery can be harmful to theenvironment and humanhealth. Dispose the batteryaccording to your local law(s)or regulation.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery,excessive pressure on the case maycause battery acid to leak, resultingin personal injury Lift with a battery

WARNING:Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-dling a battery.Keep lighted cigarettes andall other flames or sparksaway from the battery.Hydrogen, which is a highlycombustible gas, is alwayspresent in battery cells andmay explode if ignited.Keep batteries out of the reachof children because batteriescontain highly corrosive SUL-FURIC ACID. Do not allow bat-tery acid to contact your skin,eyes clothing or paint finish

! WARNING:

Page 228: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 228/271

The engine cooling fan should come onautomatically if the engine coolant tem-

perature is high.

G220C01A-AAT

Checking Condenser Cooling Fan

The condenser cooling fan should comeon automatically whenever the air condi-

tioner is in operation.

in personal injury. Lift with a batterycarrier or with your hands on oppo-site corners.

o Never attempt to charge the batterywhen the battery cables are con-nected.

o The electrical ignition system workswith high voltage.Never touch these components withthe engine running or the ignition

switched on.

eyes, clothing or paint finish.If any electrolyte gets intoyour eyes, flush your eyeswith clean water for at least15 minutes and get immedi-ate medical attention. If pos-sible, continue to apply waterwith a sponge or cloth untilmedical attention is received.If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the con-tacted area.If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medical atten-tion immediately.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

22

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the powert i h ti f fl id l k

POWER STEERING FLUIDLEVEL

G230A01MC-AAT

(If Installed)

The power steering fluid level should bechecked regularly. To check the powersteering fluid level, be sure the engine is"OFF", then check to make certain that the

NOTE:o Grinding noise from the power steer-

ing pump may be heard immediatelyafter the engine is started in ex-tremely cold conditions (below -4°F).If the noise stops during warm up,there is no abnormal function in thesystem. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely coldconditions.

o Do not start the engine when thepower steering oil reservoir is empty.

OMC055014

FOR MORE INFORMATIONABOUT YOUR HYUNDAI

G250A01A-AAT

If you desire additional information aboutmaintaining and servicing your Hyundai,you may purchase a factory Shop Manualat your Hyundai dealer's parts depart-ment. This is the same manual used bydealership technicians and while it ishighly technical it can be useful in obtain-ing a better understanding of your carand how it works.

Page 229: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 229/271

steering hose connections for fluid leak-age at those intervals specified in the

vehicle maintenance schedule in Section5.The power steering hoses should be re-placed if there is severe surface cracking,pulling, scuffing or worn spots. Deteriora-tion of the hose could cause prematurefailure.

OFF , then check to make certain that thepower steering fluid level is between the"MAX" and "MIN" level markings on thefluid reservoir.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

23REPLACEMENT OF LIGHTBULBS

!

G260A01MC-AAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb,be sure the switch is turned to the "OFF"position.The next paragraph shows how to reachthe light bulbs so they may be changed.Be sure to replace the burned-out bulbwith one of the same number and watt-age rating.See page 6-29 for the wattage descrip-tions.

CAUTION:o Keep the lamps out of contact with

petroleum products, such as oil,gasoline, etc.

o If you don't have necessary tools,

G270A02MC-GAT

Headlight, Front Turn Signal Lightand Front Fog Light CAUTION:

o The headlight aiming should bechecked by an authorized Hyundaidealer after replacing the headlightbulbs.

o After heavy, driving rain or washing,headlight and taillight lenses couldappear frosty. This condition iscaused by the temperature differ-ence between the lamp inside and

outside. This is similar to the con-densation on your windows insideyour vehicle during the rain anddoesn’t indicate a problem with yourvehicle. If the water leaks into thelamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle

!

OMC055021

Turn signallight

Headlight

Fog light

Type A

Type B

Page 230: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 230/271

Headlight

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye pro-tection.

2. Open the engine hood and disconnectthe negative (-) post of the battery.

3. Always grasp the bulb by its plasticbase, avoid touching the glass.

4. Disconnect the power cord from theback of the headlight.

the correct bulbs and the expertise,consult your authorized Hyundaidealer.

checked by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

OMC050021

Headlight

Turn signallight

Fog light

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

24

G270A03O

! WARNING:o When removing/replacing halogen

bulbs, always handle the metal bodyof the bulb, not the glass.

5. Remove the socket cover.6. Push the bulb spring to remove the

headlight bulb.7. Remove the protective cap from the

replacement bulb and install the newbulb by matching the plastic base with

OMC055022

Front Turn Signal light

1. Open the engine hood and disconnectthe negative (-) post of the battery.

2. Disconnect the power cord from thebulb

OMC055023

Page 231: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 231/271

o The halogen bulb contains gas underpressure and if impacted could shat-ter, resulting in flying fragments. Al-ways wear eye protection when ser-vicing the bulb. Protect the bulbagainst abrasions or scratches andagainst liquids when lighted. Turnthe bulb on only when installed in aheadlight. Replace the headlight ifdamaged or cracked. Keep the bulbout of the reach of children and dis-pose of the used bulb with care.

bulb by matching the plastic base withthe headlight hole. Reattach the bulb

spring and install the socket cover.Reconnect the power cord.8. Use the protective cap and carton to

dispose of the old bulb.9.Check for proper headlight aim.

bulb.3. Take out the bulb from the bulb holder

by turning it counterclockwise.4. Install the new bulb.

Front Fog Light (If Installed)NOTE:It is recommended that the front foglight bulb be replaced by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

25

OMC055026

3. Remove the nuts of the rear combina-tion light with a spanner.

G270D01MC-AAT

Rear Combination Light1. Open the trunk lid (4 Door) or tail gate

(3 Door).

OMC055024

OMC055025

2. Remove the cover on the inside ofluggage trim

4 Door

4 Door 4 Door

3 Door

Page 232: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 232/271

4. Detach the rear combination lamp bypulling it out (4 Door) or remove the

mounting screws of the rear combina-tion lamp with a phillips screwdriver (3Door).

luggage trim.

OMC055026-1

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

26

5. To replace the rear combination light,take it out from the bulb holder byturning it counterclockwise.

(1) Tail Light(2) Turn Signal Light

OMC055027

G270C01MC-GAT

Luggage Compartment Light

OMC0550283. Replace with a new bulb.

HTB284

3 Door

4 Door

Page 233: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 233/271

OMC055028-1

( ) g g(3) Back-up Light(4) Stop/Tail Light

6. Install the new bulb.

1. Open the trunk lid (4 Door) or tail gate(3 Door).2. Carefully remove the cover with a flat-

head screwdriver.

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

27

G270G01MC-GAT

Map Light (If Installed)

1. Remove the cover with a flat-headscrewdriver.

2. Replace with a new bulb.

OMC055029

G270E01A-GAT

Side Repeater Light(If Installed)

1. Push the cover toward the front ofvehicle and remove it.

2. Disconnect the power code.

G220200AEN

Side Repeater Light(If Installed)

OMC029250

If the light bulb is not operating, have thevehicle checked by an authorizedHyundai dealer

G270E01MC

Type A Type B

Page 234: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 234/271

3. Replace with a new bulb.Hyundai dealer.

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

28

G275H01MC-GAT

Interior Light

1. Remove the cover with a flat-headscrewdriver.

2. Replace with a new bulb.

OMC055030

Page 235: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 235/271

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

29BULB WATTAGE

G280A03MC-AAT

OMC059020L

Bulb Type Part NamePart NameNo. No.Wattage Wattage Bulb Type

4 Door 3 Door

Page 236: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 236/271

HB2 Long Life

2357

10W (FESTOON)

10W (FESTOON)

GE881

LED Type

Side Repeater Light (If Installed)

Stop/Tail Light

High Mounted Rear Stop Light

Luggage Compartment Light

Rear Turn Signal Light

Back-up Light

License Plate Light

Headlight (High/Low)

Front Turn Signal Light/

Side Marker Light

Map Light (If Installed)

Interior Light

Front Fog Light (If Installed)

Side Repeater Light (If Installed)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

55/60

28/8

10

10

27

0.4

5

27/8

16

5

27

16

5

WY5W

1157

W16W

C5W

1156

W16W

C5W

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

30 FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

FUSE RATING125A50A40A40A

40A40A30A30A30A30A30A20A

15A

10A10A10A10A

G200C01MC-AAT

Engine CompartmentCIRCUIT PROTECTED

GeneratorI/P Junction BoxBlower Relay, Blower MotorABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check ConnectorABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check ConnectorStart Relay, Ignition SwitchIgnition SwitchI/P Junction Box, Tail Lamp RelayI/P Junction Box, Power Window RelayRadiator Fan RelayMain Relay, Fuel Pump RelayECM, PCMInjector #1, #2, #3, #4, CVVT Oil Control Valve, Immobilizer Control Module,PurgeControl Solenoid Valve, Idle Speed Control Actuator, Fuel Pump RelayA/Con RelayA/C Control ModuleECM, PCMHorn Relay, Burglar Alarm Horn RelayA/Con Relay Rad Fan Relay Cond Fan Relay #1 #2 Camshaft Position

MAINBATT #1BLOWERABS #1ABS #2IGN #2IGN #1

BATT #2P/WDW

RADECU AECU C

INJ

A/CON #1A/CON #2

ECU BHORN

FUSE

Page 237: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 237/271

10A

30A

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When youinspect the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

A/Con Relay, Rad Fan Relay, Cond Fan Relay #1, #2, Camshaft PositionSensor,Oxygen Sensor(UP, DOWN), Mass Air Flow SensorCondenser Fan Relay #1

SNSR

COND

G200C01MC

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

31

G200E01MC-AAT

Inner PanelFUSE RATING

25A

25A10A

25A10A

10A

15A25A10A10A

20A

10A

10A

30A25A

CIRCUIT PROTECTEDDriver Power Window Switch, Assist Power Window Switch,Rear Power WindowSwitch RHDriver Power Window Switch, Rear Power Window Switch LHPower Outside Mirror Switch, Digital Clock, Audio

Cigarette Lighter, Power OutletHead Lamp LH, DRL Control ModuleECM, Driver Power Outside Mirror Motor,Assist Power Outside Mirror Motor, PCM,Rear Defogger SwitchMulti-function Swicth, Rear Wiper MotorMulti-function Switch, Front Wiper MotorRear Combination Lamp LH, License Lamp LH(3DOOR),Turn Signal Lamp LHFront Fog RelayDriver Seat Warmer Switch, Assist Seat Warmer SwitchActive Interior & Humidity Sensor, A/C Control Module, BCM, Blower Relay, SunroofMotorRear Combination Lamp RH, License Lamp RH(3DOOR), License Lamp(4DOOR),Shunt Connector, Turn Signal Lamp RHBCM, Rear Defogger, Rear Defogger RelayAMP

P/WDW RH

P/WDW LHAUDIO

C/LIGHTERH/LP (LH)

HTD MIRR

RR WIPERFR WIPER

TAIL LP (LH)IGN

HTD SEAT

BLOWER

TAIL LP (RH)

HTD GLASSAMP

FUSE

Page 238: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 238/271

G200E01MC

25A10A10A15A10A

AMPHead Lamp RH, Instrument Cluster, DRL Control ModuleHazard Relay, Hazard SwitchSRS Control ModuleTelltale Lamp, Passenger Seat Track Position Sensor

AMPH/LP (RH)HAZARDA/BAGSNSR

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

32

FUSE RATING

10A

20A10A

10A

15A

10A10A

20A

10A

10A

15A

15A

CIRCUIT PROTECTEDFront Fog Lamp Switch, Front Fog Lamp LH, Front Fog Lamp RH, Front FogLamp RelaySunroof MotorHazard Switch

Overdrive Switch, Vehicle Speed SensorData Link Connector, Stop Lamp Switch, P/WDW Relay,Multipurpose CheckConnectorInstrument ClusterECM, PCMDriver Door Lock Actuator, Assist Door Lock Actuator, BCM,Rear Door LockActuator LH, Rear Door Lock Actuator RH,Driver Power Window Switch, TailGate Lock ActuatorStart Relay, Burglar Alarm RelayBCM, Instrument Cluster, Generator, DRL Control Module, Tire PressureMonitoring Module, Pre-excitation ResistorIgnition Coil #1, #2, #3, #4, Condenser

Audio

Luggage Lamp, Room Lamp, Vanity Lamp Switch, Digital Clock,Overhead

FR FOG LP

S/ROOFT/SIG LP

TCU

STOP LP

A/BAG INDECU

C/DR LOCK

START

CLUSTER

IGN COILAUDIO

(Power Connector)

FUSE

Page 239: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 239/271

10A

10A10A10A

Luggage Lamp, Room Lamp, Vanity Lamp Switch, Digital Clock,OverheadConsole Lamp, A/C Control Module, Instrument Cluster, Door Warning Switch,BCM, Tire Pressure Monitoring ModuleABS Control Module, Multipurpose Check ConnectorBack-up Lamp Switch, Transaxle Range Switch, Multipurpose Check ConnectorDRL Control Module

MULT B/UP

(Power Connector)

ABSB/UP LP

DRL

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7

Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

Page 240: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 240/271

7

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fueltank are absorbed and stored in theonboard canister. When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in thecanister are drawn into the induction sys-tem through the purge control solenoidvalve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is con-trolled by the Engine Control Module(ECM); when the engine coolant tem-perature is low during idling, the PCSVcloses so that evaporated fuel is not takeninto the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSVopens to introduce evaporated fuel to theengine

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission ControlSystem

The positive crankcase ventilation sys-tem is employed to prevent air pollutioncaused by blow-by gases being emittedfrom the crankcase. This system suppliesfiltered fresh air to the crankcase throughthe air intake hose. Inside the crankcase,the fresh air mixes with blow-by gases,then passes through the PCV valve intothe induction system.

H010A01A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emis-sion control system to meet all require-ments of the U.S. Environmental Protec-tion Agency or California Air ResourcesBoard.There are three emission control systemswhich are as follows.

1) Crankcase Emission Control System2) Evaporative Emission Control System3) Exhaust Emission Control System

In order to ensure the proper function ofthe emission control systems, it is recom-mended that you have your car inspectedand maintained by an authorized Hyundaidealer in accordance with the mainte-nance schedule in this manual.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (In-cluding ORVR: Onboard Refuel-ing Vapor Recovery) System

Th E ti E i i C t l S

Page 241: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 241/271

engine.The Evaporative Emission Control Sys-

tem is designed to prevent fuel vaporsfrom escaping into the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allowthe vapors from the fuel tank to be loadedinto a canister while refueling at the gasstation, preventing the escape of fuelvapors into the atmosphere.)

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3CATALYTIC CONVERTER

!H010D02A-AAT

3. Exhaust EmissionControl System

The Exhaust Emission Control System isa highly effective system which controlsexhaust emissions while maintaininggood vehicle performace.

H020A03A-AAT

(If Installed)

Hyundai vehicle is equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter toreduce the carbon monoxide, hydrocar-bons and nitrogen oxides contained inthe exhaust gas. Exhaust gases passing

H020A01MCCatalytic Converter

WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operat-

ing condition. Extremely high cata-lytic converter temperatures can re-sult from improper operation of theelectrical, ignition or multiport elec-tronic fuel injection.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks,or is hard to start, have your Hyundaidealer inspect and repair the prob-lem as soon as possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuellevel. Running out of gasoline maycause the engine to misfire and re-sult in damage to the catalytic con-verter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periods

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of

automobile components and parts, in-cluding components found in the inte-rior furnishings in a vehicle, contain oremit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birthdefects and reproductive harm. In addi-tion, certain fluids contained in vehiclesand certain products of component

Page 242: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 242/271

g g p gthrough the catalytic converter cause it tooperate at a very high temperature. Theintroduction of large amounts of unburnedgasoline into the exhaust may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and createa fire hazard. This risk may be reduced byobserving the following:

longer than 10 minutes.o The vehicle should not be pushed or

pulled to get started. This may causethe catalytic converter to overheatand create a fire hazard.

and certain products of component

wear contain or emit chemicals knownto the State of California to cause can-cer and birth defects or other repro-ductive harm.

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

4

! WARNING:o Do not touch the catalytic converter

or any other part of the exhaust sys-

tem while the catalytic converter ishot. Shut off the engine, wait for atleast one hour before touching thecatalytic converter or any other partof the exhaust system.

o Remember that your Hyundai dealeris your best source of assistance.

o Do not park, idle or drive your ve-hicle over any combustible materialsuch as grass, paper, leaves or rags.These materials might contact thehot catalytic converter and a firemight result.

Page 243: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 243/271

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-3Tire Information ............................................................. 8-3Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures .............. 8-3Checking Tire Inflation Pressure .................................. 8-6Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-6

Tire Terminology and Definitions .................................. 8-8All Season Tires ......................................................... 8-10Snow Tires.................................................................. 8-10Tire Chains ................................................................. 8-11Tire Rotation ............................................................... 8-11Tire Balancing ............................................................. 8-12 8

Page 244: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 244/271

Tire Traction................................................................ 8-12When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-12Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-13Spare Tire and Tools .................................................. 8-14Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ......................... 8-15Consumer Information ................................................ 8-15Reporting Safety Defects ........................................... 8-18Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ...................... 8-18

8

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010A02MC-AAT The vehicle identification number (VIN) isthe number used in registering your carand in all legal matters pertaining to itsownership, etc. It can be found in fourdifferent places on your car:

1. The number is punched on floor underthe front passenger seat. To check thenumber, remove the cover.

2. The VIN is also on a plate attached tothe top of the dashboard. The numberon the plate can easily be seen throughthe windshield from outside.

3. The vehicle certification label attachedon the driver's side center pillar givesthe vehicle identification number (VIN).

4. On the lower side of the center pillarouter panel.

1JBA5003

OMC079011

1

2

3

4

Page 245: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 245/271

OMC079010

1JBA5005

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

3ENGINE NUMBER

I010B01A-AAT

The engine number is stamped on theengine block as shown in the drawing.

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyndaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-

mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacture's book-let included with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

I030A02MC-AAT

RECOMMENDED COLD TIRE INFLA-TION PRESSURES

Tire label located on the driver's sideof the center pillar outer panel givesthe cold tire pressures recommendedfor your vehicle with the original tire

OMC079012

OMC065001

Page 246: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 246/271

for your vehicle with the original tiresize, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

4

!

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combina-tion of ride comfort, tire wear andstability under normal conditions. Tire

pressures should be checked at leastmonthly. Proper tire inflation pressuresshould be maintained for these rea-sons:

WARNING:o Inspect your tires frequently for

proper inflation as well as wearand damage. Always use a tirepressure gauge.

o Tires with too much or too littlepressure wear unevenly causingpoor handling, loss of vehicle

OMC040405 OMC040407

Type A

Type B

Type C

Type D

Page 247: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 247/271

p g,

control, and sudden tire failureleading to accidents, injuries, andeven death. The recommendedcold tire pressure for your ve-hicle can be found in this manualand on the tire label located onthe driver's side of the center

pillar.OMC040406 OMC040408

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

5

!

!

o Worn tires can cause accidents.Replace tires that are worn, showuneven wear, or are damaged.See page 8-12.

o Remember to check the pressureof your spare tire. Hyundai rec-ommends that you check thespare every time you check thepressure of the other tires on

your vehicle.

WARNING:

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least threehours or hasn't been driven morethan one mile (1.6 km) since start-ing up.)

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Never overload your vehicle. Beespecially careful about overload-ing if you equip your vehicle witha luggage rack

!WARNING:

NOTE:o Underinflation also results in ex-

cessive wear, poor handling andreduced fuel economy. Wheel de-

formation also is possible. Keepyour tire pressures at the properlevels. If a tire frequently needsrefilling, have it checked by yourHyundai Dealer.

o Overinflation produces a harshride, excessive wear at the centerof the tire tread, and a greaterpossibility of damage from roadhazards.

Page 248: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 248/271

Overinflation or underinflation canreduce the tire life, adversely affectvehicle handling, and lead to sud-den tire failure. This could rusult inloss of vehicle control and potentialinjury.

a luggage rack.o Worn, old tires can cause acci-

dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

6

If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in thecenter of the tire valve. Recheck thetire pressure with the tire gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on thevalve stems. They help prevent leaksby keeping out dirt and moisture.

Federal law requires tire manufactur-ers to place standardized informationon the sidewall of all tires. This infor-mation identifies and describes thefundamental characteristics of the tire

I030B01MC-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or

more. Also, check the tire pressure ofthe spare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gauge to check tirepressure. You can not tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1

Page 249: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 249/271

and also provides the tire identificationnumber (TIN) for safety standard cer-tification. The TIN can be used toidentify the tire in case of a recall.

mile (1.6 km).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add airuntil you reach the recommendedamount.

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

7

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size (example: P175/70R14)

o The "P" indicates the tire is de-signed for passenger vehicles. A"T" is the designation for a tempo-rary spare tire.

o Three-digit number (175): Thisnumber gives the width in millime-ters of the tire from sidewall edgeto sidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (70): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.

o T: Speed Rating. The speed rat-ing denotes the speed at which atire is designed to be driven forextended periods of time. The

ratings range from "A" to "Z" (98to 186 MPH).3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) for

new tire (example: DOT XX XXXXX XXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "De-

partment of Transportation". Thesymbol can be placed above, be-low or to the left or right of the TireIdentification Number. Indicatestire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of TransportationMotor Vehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer's

4. Tire ply composition and mate-rialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maxi-mum permissible inflation pressure

Page 250: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 250/271

o Two-digit number (14): This num-ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two (or three) digit number (84):This number is the tire's load in-dex. It is a measurement of howmuch weight each tire can sup-

port.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3109means the 31st week of 2009.

mum permissible inflation pressure.Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-mation label for recommended infla-tion pressure.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

8

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air inside

the tire pressing outward on the tire.Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,

power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cordsthat is located between the plies andthe tread. Cords may be made fromsteel or other reinforcing materials.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount ofair pressure in a tire, measured inpounds per square inch (psi) orkilopascals (kPa) before a tire has

built up heat from driving.Curb Weight: This means the weightof a motor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded intothe sidewall of a tire signifying that thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation motorvehicle safety standards. The DOTcode includes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumeric desig-nator which can also identify the tire

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maxi-mum load in kilograms and poundsthat can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. Formore information, see Uniform TireQuality Grading on page 8-15.

Page 251: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 251/271

stee o ot e e o c g ate a s.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the plies are laid at alternateangles less than 90 degrees to the

centerline of the tread.

nator which can also identify the tiremanufacturer, production plant, brandand date of production.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rat-ing for the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating

for the rear axle.

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

9

Intended Outboard Sidewall: Theside of an asymmetrical tire, that mustalways face outward when mounted ona vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessory

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The sideof a asymmetrical tire that has a par-

ticular side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the samemoldings on the other sidewall of thetire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure and shown on

Rim: A metal support for a tire andupon which the tire beads are seated.Sidewall: The portion of a tire be-tween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can oper-ate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," thatshow across the tread of a tire whenonly 2/32 inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Page 252: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 252/271

e su o cu b we g t; accesso yweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).

pthe tire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.

UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings are

molded into the sidewall of the tire.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

10

I040A01O-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and

have the same load capacity as theoriginal tires. Snow tires should beinstalled on all four wheels; otherwise,poor handling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires on

the tire label on the driver's side of thecenter pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewallwhichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-

mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-son tires are identified by ALL SEA-SON and/or M+S (Mud and Snow) onthe tire sidewall. Snow tires have bettersnow traction than all season tires anmay be more appropriate in some areas.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-ber of designated seating positionsmultiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus therated cargo and luggage load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand driving by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure.

Page 253: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 253/271

p

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

11

!

!

I050A01MC-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be sure

that the chains are installed in accor-dance with the manufacturer's instruc-tions.

To minimize tire and chain wear, donot continue to use tire chains whenthey are no longer needed.

WARNING:o If your vehicle is equipped with

P205/45R16 size tires, do not in-stall tire chains. This may causedamage to the vehicle (wheels,

o If you have noise caused bychains contacting the body, re-tighten the chain to avoid contactwith the vehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, re-tighten the chains after driving0.3~0.6 miles.

o Don't use tire chains on a vehicle

equipped with aluminium wheels.If it is unavoidable, use wire typechains.

o Use wire chains less than 15 mmto prevent damage to the chain'sconnection.

WARNING:

I060A02A-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly betweenrotations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may be

HEF-241

Page 254: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 254/271

suspension and body) by chainscontacting the body.o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at lessthan 20 mph (30 km/h).

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &plastic chains.

corrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check the wheel nuttorque.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

12

I090A05A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

Tread wearindicator

The original tires on your car havetread wear indicators. The location oftread wear indicators is shown by the"TWI" or " " marks, etc., The treadwear indicators appear when the tread

OMC055017

! WARNING:o Do not use the temporary spare

tire for tire rotation.o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply

tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could resultin death, serious injury, or prop-erty damage.

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires onyour Hyundai were balanced beforethe car was delivered but may needbalancing again during the years youown the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted forrepair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if youdrive on worn tires, tires that are im-

Page 255: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 255/271

depth is 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tireshould be replaced when these appearas a solid bar across two or moregrooves of the tread. Always replaceyour tires with those of the recom-mended size. If you change wheels,the new wheel's rim width and offsetmust meet Hyundai specification.

properly inflated or on slippery roadsurfaces. Tires should be replacedwhen tread wear indicators appear. Toreduce the possibility of losing control,slow down whenever there is rain,snow or ice on the road.

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

13

!

!! WARNING:To reduce the chance or serious orfatal injuries from an accidentcaused by tire failure or loss ofvehicle control:o Replace tires that are worn, show

uneven wear, or are damaged.Worn tires can cause loss of brak-ing effectiveness, steering con-trol, and traction.

o Do not drive your vehicle with toolittle or too much pressure inyour tires. This can lead to un-even wear and tire failure.

o When replacing tires, never mixradial and bias-ply tires on thesame car. You must replace all

( l d h ) f

I090B02JM-AAT

TIRE MAINTENANCE

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn un-evenly, have your dealer check thewheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tire

life. Additionally, a tire shoud alwaysbe rebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sspecifications may fit poorly and

result in damage to the vehicle orunusual handling and poor ve-hicle control.

o Tires degrade over time, even whenthey are not being used. Regard-less of the remaining tread, it isrecommended that tires tread, It is

recommended that tires generallybe replaced after 6 years of normalservice. Heat caused by hot cli-mates or frequent high loadingconditions can accelerate the ag-ing process. Failure to follow thisWarning can result in sudden tirefailure, which could lead to a loss

WARNING:

WARNING:o Underinflated or overinflated tires

h dl l f

Page 256: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 256/271

tires (including the spare) if mov-ing from radial to bias-ply tires.o Using tires and wheel other than

the recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics and poor vehicle con-trol, resulting in a serious acci-dent.

of control and an accident involv-ing serious injury or death.

o The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. Tire size canaffect wheel speed. When replac-ing tires, all 4 tires must use thesame size originally supplied withthe vehicle. Using tires of a differ-ent size can cause the ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) (If Installed)to work irregularly.

can cause poor handling, loss ofvehicle control, and sudden tirefailure leading to accidents, inju-ries, and even death. Alwayscheck tires are properly inflatedbefore driving. Refer to pages 2-20 and 8-3 for proper tire pres-sures and further information.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

14

! WARNING:

I100A01MC-AAT

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLSI110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available fromyour authorized Hyundai dealer. It's writ-ten for professional technicians, but is

simple enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.

D060B01MC A

o Driving on tires with no or insuf-ficient tread is dangerous. Worn-

out tires can result in loss ofvehicle control, collisions, andinjury and even death. Worn-outtires should be replaced as soonas possible and should never beused for driving. Always check tire tread before driving your car.

Refer to this page for further in-formation and tread limits.

Page 257: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 257/271

Your Hyundai is delivered with thefollowing:

Spare tire and wheelJack, Towing hook (If Installed)Wrench bar, Wheel nut wrench

D060B01MC-A

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

15CONSUMER INFORMATION

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been pre-pared in accordance with regulations is-sued by the National Highway TrafficSafety Administration of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation. It provides thepurchasers and/or prospective purchas-ers of Hyundai automobiles with informa-tion on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer anyquestions you may have as you read thisinformation.

I130B05A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal motor vehicleSafety Standards in addition to thesegrades. These quality grades aremolded on the sidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wear

rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specifiedgovernment test course. For example,a tire graded 150 would wear one anda half (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresd d th t l diti f

WARRANTIES FOR YOURHYUNDAI VEHICLE

I120A03A-AAT

Please consult your Owner's Handbook & Warranty Information booklet for yourvehicle's specific warranty coverage.

Page 258: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 258/271

depends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due tovariations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in road char-acteristics and climate.

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

16

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material ofthe tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade C

corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires mustmeet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels of perfor-mance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

! WARNING:The temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire that is prop-erly inflated and not overloaded.Excessive speed, underinflation, orexcessive loading, either separatelyor in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewall betweentread shoulder and maximum sectionwidth.For example:

TREAD wear 200

!

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-sent the tire's ability to stop on wetpavement as measured under con-

trolled conditions on specified govern-ment test surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.

WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

Page 259: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 259/271

TREAD wear 200TRACTION AATEMPERATUE A

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

17

Southern Region : Florida, Georgia, NorthCarolina, South Carolina.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite A

Austell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

South Central Region : Alabama, Arkan-sas, Louisiana, Mississippi, Missouri, NewMexico, Oklahoma, Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400Coppell, TX 75019(800) 633-5151

Central Region : Illinois, Indiana, lowa,Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Ne-braska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Western Region : Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona,Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, Or-egon, Utah, Washington, Wyoming.

Western Region

10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

California Region : California

California Region

10550 Talbert AvenueP.O. Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151

I130D05A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designedand manufactured to meet or exceed allapplicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we stronglyurge you to read and follow all directionsin this Owner's Manual, particularly theinformation under the headings "NOTE","CAUTION" and "WARNING" .

If, after reading this manual, you haveany questions regarding the operation ofyour vehicle, please contact your nearestHyundai Motor America Regional Officeas listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Massachusetts, New Hampshire,New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island, Vermont.

Eastern Region

Page 260: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 260/271

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Page 261: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 261/271

Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9

Page 262: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 262/271

9

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

Tire Size

P175/70 R14, P185/65 R14, P195/55 R15

P175/70 R14, P185/65 R14, P205/45 R16

T115/70 D15

in. (mm)

Liter

45

4Door

3Door

Spare

US. gal

11.9Fuel tank capacity

Imp.gal

9.9

Inflation Pressure

32PSI (220 kPa)

60PSI (420 kPa)

J010A03MC-AAT

MEASUREMENT

J020A01MC-AAT

POWER STEERING

J060A01A-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J050A02MC-AATBRAKE

J030A03MC-AAT

TIRE

4 DOOR169.3 (4300)

66.7 (1695)57.8 (1470)98.4 (2500)

57.8 (1470) / 58.4 (1485)*

57.4 (1460) / 58 (1475)*

ItemOverall length

Overall widthOverall heightWheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

3 DOOR159.2 (4045)

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.59 in. (142 mm)175 Tire only

* with P175/70R14 Tire

Page 263: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 263/271

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Drum

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

BRAKE

Oil pump type

( )5.43 in. (138 mm)

Vane type

yExcept 175 Tire

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3ENGINE

SPECIFICATIONS

1.6 MPI

4-Cylinder in-line DOHC

3.01 x 3.42 in. (76.5 x 87 mm)

1,599

700 ± 100

BTDC 5° ± 5°

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

J070A02MC-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacement (cc)Idle Speed (RPM)

Ignition timing (Base)

Firing order

Page 264: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 264/271

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

API Service SM* or above,

ILSAC GF-4 or above

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other

brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.

PSF-3

DOT 3, DOT 4 or Equivalent

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

SAE 5W-20, 5W-30

(ALL TEMP. RANGE)

SAE 10W-30 [ABOVE 0°F (-18°C)]

LUBRICATION CHART

Item

Engine oil

Recommends

Transaxle Manual

Automatic

Power steering

Brake fluid

Coolant Manual

Transaxle

Automatic

J080A02MC-AAT

Q'ty (US.QTS)(Imp.qts, liter)

Drain and refill

Without oil filter : 3.17 (2.6, 3.0)

With oil filter : 3.48 (2.9, 3.3)

2 (1.67, 1.9)

6.44 (5.3, 6.1)

As required

As required

5.49 (4.5, 5.2)

Page 265: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 265/271

Automatic

Transaxle5.60 (4.6, 5.3)

* : If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.

10

INDEX

Page 266: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 266/271

10

Page 267: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 267/271

Page 268: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 268/271

Page 269: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 269/271

Page 270: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 270/271

10 INDEX

6

TransaxleAutomatic .......................................................................... 2-9Automatic transaxle fluid checking ................................ 6-12Manual .............................................................................. 2-6Manual transaxle oil checking ....................................... 6-12

Trip Computer .................................................................... 1-73Trip Odometer .......................................................... 1-71, 1-72Trunk Lid/Tail Gate............................................................. 1-96

Remote trunk lid release ................................................ 1-97

V

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .................................... 8-2

Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................. 2-20Vehicle Specifications .......................................................... 9-1

W

Warning and Indicator Lights ............................................ 1-64Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ............................... 8-15Windows ............................................................................. 1-11

Window lock .................................................................... 1-12Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch .............................. 1-78

Page 271: Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

8/3/2019 Accent 2010MY Owners Manual

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/accent-2010my-owners-manual 271/271

Adjustable Intermittent wiper operation ......................... 1-80Mist wiper operation ....................................................... 1-79Rear window wiper and washer .................................... 1-80Washer reservoir ............................................................ 6-11Windshield washer operation ........................................ 1-79

Windshield Wiper Blades .................................................. 6-10